Autodesk Inventor 8

®

Essentials

Official Training Courseware

52708-010000-1710A

January 23, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of this product at the time of its publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION*, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com, Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint, Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.

Autodesk Canada Inc. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, backdraft, MultiMaster Editing.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc., trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Starting an Autodesk Inventor Design Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Autodesk Inventor Workflow Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Autodesk Inventor Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Part Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Assembly Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Presentation Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Using Templates Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Projects in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Project Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Project Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Creating Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Editing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Exercise: Projects in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 The User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 The Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 The Panel Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 3D Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Exercise: The User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Online Help and Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Help Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 How To Popups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 What's New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Visual Syllabus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Help For AutoCAD Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Autodesk Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Exercise: Online Help and Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Challenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Creating Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Sketch Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Sketch Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

i

Rules for Creating Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Sketch Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Precise Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Editing Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Sketch Doctor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Exercise: Creating Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Constraining Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Constraining Sketches in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Planning Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Showing and Deleting Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Show All Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Use Construction Geometry in the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Exercise: Constraining Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Dimensioning Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Parametric Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Driven Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Additional Options for Applying Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Automatic Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Displaying Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Guidelines for Dimensioning Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Exercise: Dimensioning Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Chapter 3: Creating Simple Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Introduction to Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consumed and Unconsumed Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sketches and Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Sketch Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Introduction to Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Sketch Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Sketch Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Part Face to Define a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Model Edge Referencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Reference Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Working with Sketch Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Extruded Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Extruded Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Extrude Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feature Relationships - Join, Cut, and Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Creating Extruded Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Revolved Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Revolved Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Revolve Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 133 134 136 137 139 140 141 143 145 148 152 153 154 155 159 160 163 165 166 167 168

ii

Contents

Feature Relationships - Join, Cut, and Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Exercise: Creating Revolved Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Challenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Default Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 The Work Plane Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Examples of Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Work Plane Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Exercise: Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Default Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 The Work Axis Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Example of Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Work Axis Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Exercise: Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Center Point Work Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 The Work Point Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Grounded Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Additional Examples of Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Exercise: Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Work Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Fillet Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 The Fillet Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Exercise: Fillet Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Chamfer Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 The Chamfer Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Exercise: Chamfer Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Hole and Thread Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 The Hole Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Thread Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Exercise: Hole and Thread Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Shell Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 The Shell Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Exercise: Shell Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Pattern Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 The Rectangular Pattern Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 The Circular Pattern Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Exercise: Pattern Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Face Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

iii

The Face Draft Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Face Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Using Color Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Using Color Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Creating and Using Color Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

266 269 270 271 273 274 275

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Introduction to Assembly Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Modeling Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Panel Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Introduction to Assembly Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-Place Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visibility Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Resequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Restructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Browser Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Browser Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabled Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounded Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Assembly Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Place Component Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sources of Placed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dragging Components into an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Placing Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Parts in Place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Work Features in Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using 2D Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Projected Edges and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Creating Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Degrees of Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unconstrained Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constrained Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constraint Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving and Rotating Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Moving Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constraining Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 279 285 286 287 288 289 291 292 292 295 296 297 298 299 301 302 303 305 307 309 312 313 314 318 319 321 324 325 326 328 328 329 332 334 335 336 340 344

iv

Contents

Editing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Using ALT-Drag to Place Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Exercise: Constraining Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Adaptive Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Introduction to Adaptive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Methods for Creating Adaptive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Adaptive Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Adaptive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Adaptive Occurrence in Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Applying Assembly Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Tips and Considerations for Using Adaptivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Exercise: Adaptive Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Assembly Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 The Analyze Interference Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 The Analyze Faces Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Locating Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Exercise: Assembly Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Creating a Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Creating Tweaks and Trails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Animating a Presentation View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Exercise: Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Challenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Setting Drafting Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Drafting Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Drawing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Exercise: Setting Drafting Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Drawing Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Editing the Default Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Using a Sheet Format for Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Creating Multiple Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Creating Sheet Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Defining a Border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Defining a Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Editing Title Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Exercise: Drawing Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Creating a Base View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Creating Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Editing Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Exercise: Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Creating Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

v

Assembly Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Views and Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Views between Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Views between Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Managing Views and Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning a Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retrieving Model Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Dimensioning a Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Annotation Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating Centerlines and Center Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes and Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: General Annotation Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

441 443 445 446 447 450 451 452 453 456 459 460 461 463 464 465 466 469 470 471 472 476 477 478 479 480 481 486 490 491 492 500 507 511 516 521 522 523

Chapter 8: Project Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Irrigation Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

vi

Contents

Preface .

2D Drafters wanting to learn the basics of 3D design techniques are also encouraged to attend this course. a training manual for use in Authorized Training Centers and in corporate training and classroom settings. Course Objectives At the end of this course. it can also be used for self-paced learning. It is recommended that you have a working knowledge of Microsoft Windows 98. This manual is part of the Autodesk Official Training Courseware (AOTC) series designed primarily for instructorled classes. or Windows XP. Note Instructor-led training in either short or long courses is an effective method to learn computer application software. and a working knowledge of parametric solid modeling concepts. The primary objectives of the manual are to help you become productive quickly with the features and functionality of Autodesk Inventor 8. Autodesk Inventor is designed for easy learning. Although this manual is designed to be used as a teaching tool for instructor-led courses.0/Windows 2000. The integrated Design Support System (DSS) provides you with ongoing support as well as access to online documentation. you will be able to: Prerequisites This course is designed to teach new users of Autodesk Inventor the essential elements of using Autodesk Inventor 8 for Mechanical Design. Windows NT 4. 2 Preface . Each exercise is taskoriented and is based on real-world examples of mechanical engineering.Preface Preface Preface Introduction Welcome to Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials Courseware. Each chapter in this manual has instructional design so that it is easy to follow and understand. and to encourage self-learning through the use of the Autodesk Inventor Design Support System (DSS).

Each topic contains an Introduction. Summarizes the chapter.Chapter Flow • • Introduction and Objectives. Provides an introduction to the chapter theme and states specific learning objectives for the chapter. Topics. Summary. constraints or warnings about the topic. • Notes and Tips Throughout this courseware. Concepts. there are Notes and Tips included for special attention. Prerequisite and Summary. All Rights Reserved 3 . Each chapter is a collection of topics that together form the theme of the chapter. Inc. Tip Notes can contain information that provides guidelines. Note Exercise Data Files Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Objectives. Tips provide special information that will enhance your productivity within the topic.

Insert the Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials CD-ROM into your computer and follow the instructions in the setup wizard. If the wizard does not automatically start. browse to the root directory of the CD and double-click Setup. 3. By default. Autodesk Inventor uses the paths in the current project file to locate other necessary files. 4 Preface . Projects Most engineers work on several projects at a time.Exercise Data Files The exercise data files for this manual are supplied in a self-installing file called Setup. To work on a different project. Each exercise has a project file that stores the paths to all the files related to the exercise. and each project may consist of a number of files. 2. the exercise files will be installed to the C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AOTC\Inventor 8\Essentials folder unless you use the Browse button to specify a different folder.exe.exe on the Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials CD attached to the back cover of your book. Autodesk Inventor uses projects to help organize related files and maintain links between files. To accommodate this. Installing the Exercise Data Files To install the files: Step 1. When you attempt to open a file. The Essentials folder contains the files necessary to complete each exercise in the training manual. you set a new project active in the Project Editor.

The online help and tutorials available for learning. Panel Bar. The main interface components found in Autodesk Inventor software.. • • File types in Autodesk Inventor. you will be able to. The Design Support System or DSS. • • In this chapter After completing this chapter. Identify the main interface components found in Autodesk Inventor software.Introduction to the Modeling Process Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about. The Browser. • • Start an Autodesk Inventor design session. Create a design using various methods and workflows. Create and edit project files for use in different environments and situations. Different types of project files and the environments in which they should be used. • • • • • • • • • ... Access the help system and other online resources for learning Autodesk Inventor software. The help system and tutorials available to Autodesk Inventor users. The typical workflow on a design session in Autodesk Inventor. and the types of files you can create and use with Autodesk Inventor software. Project files in Autodesk Inventor. Creating and editing project files. and other interface features that are common to all Autodesk Inventor design environments.. different assembly modeling concepts.

Understand the concept of Parametric Modeling. you will be able to: • • • • • Start an Autodesk Inventor design session. and file types. Understand the typical design workflow when using Autodesk Inventor. workflow. Understand how to use template files. 6 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . Objectives After completing this lesson. Understand the available file types in Autodesk Inventor.Getting Started Overview Overview Overview In this lesson you will learn the Autodesk Inventor software interface.

Starting an Autodesk Inventor Design Session The first time you start an Autodesk Inventor design session. All Rights Reserved 7 . Learn about projects: This option presents the Autodesk Inventor Help Site Map. the open dialog box will appear showing the Getting Started screen with links to various resources. Learn how to build models quickly: This option opens the main page to a series of helpful tutorials such as Using Constraints. this screen will present you with links to some helpful information. Creating Assemblies. Learn about AutoCAD to Inventor Help: This option launches a help file specifically designed for AutoCAD users making the transition to Autodesk Inventor. Creating a Part. with focus on the Autodesk Inventor Projects help links. Procedure Open Dialog Box .Getting Started Pane Getting Started • • • See "What's New" in Autodesk Inventor: This link opens a help file containing all the new features in this release. Each link • • Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. and Advanced Topics. Learn about constraints: This option launches a multi-media presentation that will teach you about constraints. If you are new to Autodesk Inventor or if you have just upgraded to the most current release. Features include slide graphics with links to specific help files and other information related to the differences between the software applications. Inc.

• • • Default Tab: Lists the default templates based upon the default units type you select during installation. click Open and the three main areas of the Open dialog box will be displayed. 8 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . in the What To Do area.Open Pane Open In the Open dialog box.presents a help topic with specific information on each project. Open Dialog Box . Metric Tab: Lists the available Metric Unit templates. click New and a list of all available templates for creating Autodesk Inventor files will be displayed. Open Dialog Box . in the What To Do area. English Tab: Lists the available English Unit templates.New Pane New In the Open dialog box.

• Locations: This window presents the folders defined in the active project file. Project Definition Pane: This window displays the project categories and paths defined for each category. Preview Window: This window will display a preview of the selected Autodesk Inventor file. in the What To Do area.Select a project file areas will be displayed. • More detailed information on Projects will follow later in this chapter. The active project will have a check mark next to the project name. The Project Location column displays the path where the project is stored. • • • Open Dialog Box . All Rights Reserved 9 . Main Window: All files and folders contained in the selected location are listed in this window. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Standard Windows Navigation Buttons: Autodesk Inventor uses standard Microsoft Windows®navigation tools in all of its file related dialog boxes. click Projects and Projects . Each folder icon represents a shortcut you can select to list its files and subfolders. Inc.Projects Pane Projects In the Open dialog box. • List of Available Projects: Double click on the project to make it active.

For example. you focus only on the shape of the sketch. You do not need to draw your lines and circles at specific lengths or diameters. After you create the sketch you place the required dimensions and the sketch geometry will update to reflect the dimension values you enter. Adaptivity enables you to create dynamic relationships between parts in an assembly.Before and After Dimensions 10 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . when you create a 2D sketch in a parametric modeler.Autodesk Inventor Workflow Concepts Autodesk Inventor is a parametric modeler. the geometry to which it has been applied will also change to reflect the new value of the parameter. As you create these dimensions. they are stored as individual parameters which you can change at a later time. As opposed to non-parametric systems whose dimension values are representative of the size of the geometry. adaptive capabilities in Autodesk Inventor will enable the related parts to change without the need to create complex cross-part parametric equations. This means that the geometry is controlled by the parameters and/or constraints that you apply. When one part changes. If the parameter changes. Concept Another key aspect to Inventor is it ability to create adaptive parts. Sketch .

Note: Is is possible to change these parameters to include formulas or use recognizable names such as Length and Width. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. the parameters are stored in a table that you can access later and change if necessary. The parametric capabilities are now extended to the assembly environment by using 3D Constraints to constrain the parts together. When you extrude your 2D sketch. After you create the part. As you create your parametric model. Constraint properties such as Offset and Angle values are stored as parameters within the assembly. you may use it in an assembly file along with other parts. All Rights Reserved 11 . the depth of the extrusion is also stored as a parameter and is then used to drive the geometry representing the extrusion. These parameters are created automatically and are used by the application to resolve geometry as new features are added.The parametric capability then extends beyond the sketch level to the 3D feature level. Inc.

those changes will be reflected in the drawing. It is possible to retrieve the parametric dimensions used in creating the geometry as well as additional dimensions as required. Drawing views are created and maintain an associative link to the part and assembly. the parametric technology is extended to the drawing environment. Basic Parametric File Relationships 12 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . The image below represents the basic file references that exist in a typical parametric design.After you create the parts and assembly. If changes occur in the part or assembly files.

Because typical design workflow changes and evolves with the design. Place and constrain the parts in the 3D Assembly (required only when the component is part of a larger assembly of components). presentations. the workflow for creating designs in Autodesk Inventor is flexible. All Rights Reserved 13 . there is no set workflow for creating designs using Autodesk Inventor. As the designer. Projects are used to resolve file references for assemblies. Use both Sketched and Placed Features to create the 3D geometry you require for your design. Use one of the templates provided to create your new part. Procedure In this lesson you will learn the typical workflow of an Autodesk Inventor design session. Inc. Typical Autodesk Inventor Design Workflow Overall Workflow of a Typical Autodesk Inventor Design Session. and drawings. within each step further variations will occur. As you proceed through this course. draw the profile of the parts base feature. • • • • • Be aware of your current Autodesk Inventor Project.Autodesk Inventor Workflow Autodesk Inventor has been designed to facilitate the typical workflow you will encounter in the design process. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you learn more about each of the steps listed below. On the initial sketch you create. you will choose the appropriate path based upon your design intent. With the exception of a couple of fundamental rules. The overall workflow of any Autodesk Inventor design will involve the following steps.

Repeat the steps above until all components are added to the assembly. Use standard assembly constraints such as Mate. 14 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . Place existing parts into the assembly or create new parts in the context of the assembly. Angle. • • • • Create a new assembly using one of the assembly templates provided. All new parts you create will have a blank sketch automatically placed. • • • • Use one of the part templates provided to create a new part. Create the profile of your geometry on the initial sketch. Creating 2D Drawings. Part Design Workflow The following steps represent the overall workflow for creating parts using Autodesk Inventor software. Tangent and Insert to position and constrain the parts to other parts in the assembly. create the Presentation representing the exploded assembly. You create Additional Sketched and/or Placed features as required to generate the necessary 3D geometry. Assembly Creation Workflow The following steps represent the overall workflow for creating assemblies using Autodesk Inventor software. You then use sketched features such as Extrude and Revolve to create your Base Feature.• • If the design requires an exploded view.

You use the part file to describe the individual parts which make up an assembly. Inc.Drawing Creation Workflow The following steps represent the overall workflow for creating drawings using Autodesk Inventor software. Repeat the steps above to create additional sheets and views as required. Use the annotation tools to create the required annotation. All Rights Reserved 15 . Part Files Part files represent the foundation of all designs using Autodesk Inventor. The file extension is *. • • • • Use one of the drawing templates provided to create a new drawing. Use standard view creation tools to create the required 2D drawing views.ipt Principle Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

File extension: *.ipn Principle 16 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .iam Presentation Files You use presentation files to create exploded views of the assembly. The assembly file contains references to all of its component files. It is also possible to animate the exploded views to simulate how the assembly should be put together or taken apart.Assembly Files Principle Assembly files consist of multiple part files assembled in a single file to represent your assembly. File extension: *. You use assembly constraints to constrain all of the parts to each other.

When you use a drawing file to create 2D views of an existing 3D model. and views required for manufacturing. Inc. annotations. File extension: *. You can also use drawing files to create simple 2D drawings in much the same way you would use other 2D drawing programs.Drawing Files You use drawing files to create the necessary 2D documentation of your design.idw Principle Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 17 . the views are associative to the 3D model and changes in model geometry are automatically reflected in the drawing. Drawing files include dimensions.

The next time you create a new Autodesk Inventor file.Using Templates Files Template files serve as the basis for all new files you create using Autodesk Inventor software.Templates To create a new Autodesk Inventor file. while the English and Metric tabs present template files for their respective units. then select the appropriate template and click Open. Principle Autodesk Inventor offers template files for each type of file. properties such as units. Template files are categorized into two main groups: (a) English for english units. snap spacing. The Default tab presents templates based upon the default unit you select during installation. click the tab representing the required unit type. and (c) Metric. and default tolerances are automatically applied to your new file. for metric units such as millimeter and meter. The Open dialog box offers three tabs: (a) Default. Need Your Own Custom Template Tab? Tip Create a new folder containing at least one file in the templates folder of your Autodesk Inventor installation. inch and feet and (b) Metric. Open Dialog Box . 18 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . (b) English. a new tab will appear in the Open dialog box with the name of your new folder. By using the template files you create.

The same is true when loading a drawing or presentation files. the location of the part files must be resolved. Inc.Projects in Autodesk Inventor Overview Overview Overview You use project files to resolve path locations of Autodesk Inventor software files. you will be able to: • • • • • Understand the concept of Projects Understand the concept of Autodesk Inventor project files Setup Autodesk Inventor Projects Create Autodesk Inventor Projects Edit Autodesk Inventor Project files Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. When an assembly file is loaded. All Rights Reserved 19 . In this lesson you will learn the concept and implementation of Autodesk Inventor software Project files. Active Project Objectives After completing this lesson.

each one will consist of multiple files and file types. This is the sole purpose of project files. and (c) drawing files. The below image represents file dependencies that exist in a typical assembly design. Typical File Dependencies When you open an assembly. or drawing file. the active project file is used to resolve path locations to the referenced files. The design and documentation of assembly models will require a minimum three different file types: (a) assembly files. drawing. or presentation file. Project Concepts Using separate files for each file type is critical for performance and is common among most parametric modeling systems. By storing path information for each project.Project Concepts When you use Autodesk Inventor software to create designs. The design and documentation of a single part file will require at least two separate files: (a) a part file and (b) a drawing file. Autodesk Inventor software knows exactly where to look for the required files when opening an assembly. presentation. 20 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . (b) part files.

and vault modes. Local Search Paths: Avoid using a local search path except for design exploration. Do not make a local search Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Workspace: A personal location where you edit your personal copy of design files in single-user. Project File Categories • Included File: In a semi-isolated environment.Project Files When you create designs you probably organize them in different folder locations. Project Files . All Rights Reserved • • 21 . but only one project can be active at any time. Inc. the master project shared by the design team is included in individual projects so that all data in the workgroup folder are accessible and managed from a single project. Do not use it for design project data. Example List of Available Projects Project File Categories Each Project file is divided into separate categories in which you will define different paths. For single-user and vault modes.Concept There is no limit to the number of project files you can create. the active project is identified by the check mark. Only one designer should use a project with a defined workspace in a single session of Autodesk Inventor at a time. semi-isolated. the workspace should be the only defined editable location. You will generally create one project file for each design you create. The same is true for Autodesk Inventor Project files. In the below image. A typical Autodesk Inventor design will make use of some or all of these categories depending on the structure of your assembly and the environment in which you are working.

Libraries: You use this category to define search paths for part libraries. Local search paths are searched after the workspace is searched. Because the library name is stored in the reference. changing the library name later will break library references. if ever. The common factors in all Libraries is that the path is considered by Autodesk Inventor software to be read-only and parts stored within a library search path rarely. • • Project Categories . Local Search Paths 4. If library folders are defined.Search Order Knowing and remembering the category search order is critical to properly implementing and managing project files. change. 22 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . The below image represents a typical Project file with path locations defined in each category. or can also include common parts that you design. • Workgroup Search Paths: Workgroup folder locations are defined in the project workgroup search path and are the master project locations used by shared and semi-isolated modes for file check out and check in. Assembly files exist in the Robot Assembly folder.path a subfolder of the workspace folder. Workgroup Search Paths A simple way to remember the search order is to remember Libraries first. it will search for files using paths contained in each category using the following order. each needs a descriptive name that should not change. 1. then the order each category appears in the Project window. Workspace 3. Libraries 2. Project Category Search Order When examining this diagram. Options: You use these properties to set specific options for the Project file. When Autodesk Inventor software needs to locate referenced files. you will see the assembly file is stored in a different location from the component files. Part libraries can consist of standard off-the-shelf components that you use in your designs. • • Component files exist in the Components folder.

it is used to resolve the component locations. Inc.Because the Components folder is a sub-folder of the defined workspace. The Hex Cap Screw is stored in a folder defined as a Library category. File Resolution Example Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 23 .

Procedure In this lesson you will learn how to setup Project files for both a single-user and multiuser environment. • • The Named Shortcut will appear in the Open dialog box. The Category Search Path stores the path location. if there are files open in Autodesk Inventor software. Open Dialog Box . setting up Projects for a single user environment will differ from multi-user environment.Project Setup How you setup your Projects will depend largely on the type of environment in which you are working.Project Pane The Projects portion of the Open dialog box is divided in to two panes. Typical Single-User Project Select Project Pane: Select a Project to edit or double-click on a Project to activate it. For example. 24 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . Note: You cannot edit the active Project or activate a different project. When you edit search paths they are divided into two sections: (a) Named Shortcut and (b) Category Search Path. Edit Project Pane: Select the category or right-click on the option you want to change. enabling you to easily navigate to the search path.

the Robot-Assembly.Location Shortcuts When you Open files. All Rights Reserved 25 . Using relative paths enables greater portability of your Project Files and datasets. the Locations area of the dialog box displays all of the Named Shortcuts contained in the active Project. the path settings begin with . When you enable the Use Relative Paths setting. In the following example.ipj file is stored in the folder C:\Designs\Robot Assembly. Relative Paths On/Off Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Open Dialog Box . Inc.\ followed by the folder location relative to the physical location of the Project file. Using Relative Paths in Your Project Files It is possible to set your Project file to use relative paths instead of storing the complete path in each category.

Project File Location Projects Folder Option Because you can store your project files in a number of different locations. you need an efficient way of locating them. If you would like to use a different path for your Project files. Project File Location We recommend that you store your project file in the upper level folder of your project design folders. On the Tools menu. This will help to keep your project file organized with your designs and will simplify portability issues. Typical File Structure .Projects Folder 26 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . The default Projects Folder option is will be set to your My Documents folder. Autodesk Inventor will be able to resolve the files as required. Autodesk Inventor software uses Windows®shortcuts to point to the project files that have been accessed on your computer. Rather than search every folder on your computer or network. enter or browse a new location. Options Dialog Box . click Application Options. As long as the folders maintain their relative location to the storage location of the Project file.When you use relative paths in your Project file. then click the Files tab. it is possible to physically move the entire folder structure to another location or storage device.

Avoid storing more than one hundred files in a single folder. To help organize your design files. Use these guidelines as you create a folder structure for files associated with a project: • • • Follow your company standards and naming conventions for the project folders. All Rights Reserved 27 . • Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. If you plan to edit files from existing designs. If you intend to reference existing design files. and off-the-shelf components such as fasteners. fittings. Listing of Project File Shortcuts Setting Up Folder Structures A typical project might have parts and assemblies unique to the project. Keep the subfolder structure relatively flat and do not store files that are unrelated to the project under the root folder. The Project file shortcuts in the right-hand pane of the Explorer window are not the actual project files. or define a library in your project that locates the root folder of the project in which the parts were released. To reduce the possibility of file resolution problems.In the below image. or electrical components. if you change the folder structure. copy them to the desired workspace or workgroup subfolder. making it a logical way to organize the files used in a design project. copy them to a library folder. standard components unique to your company. They are Windows®shortcuts to the actual project files. or rename files. set up a folder structure before you create a project and start saving files. you are likely to break file references. You can keep all your design files for a project in the subfolders. move. Because references are stored as relative paths from project folders. Always save new files in the workspace or workgroup defined for your project or one of its subfolders. Inc. the My Documents folder is selected to list all files. it is a good idea to set up subfolders under your project workspace or workgroup folder.

The file check-out status is not available in the browser. Multi User = Off Use relative path = True Old versions to keep on save = 1 (the higher the number the more disk space required). you can locate the workgroup on his or her computer and make it available as a network share to other team members. changing the library name later will break library references. Place the project Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process Options 28 . except for files referenced from libraries.) Not defined. shared is the least flexible because all design team members share a single workgroup location. and locate the Workgroup at . One or more defined.\. each needs a descriptive name that should not change. One defined at . Not defined. Because the library name is stored in the reference. Of the multi-user modes. • Off (Single User): You use this option for a single-user environment where Check-In and Check-Out capabilities are not required because the data is not shared with others in a workgroup. If library folders are defined. A shared project defines a workgroup location and one or more library locations. Original files are stored in a personal workspace that is intended to be used by only a single user. If one designer is doing most of the work. You do not have to check out files.Multi-User Project Settings There are four Multi-User settings that you can use to control the type of Project. Typical Multi-User Off (single) project setup Included File Workspace search paths Local search paths Workgroup search paths Library Locations Not defined. (Same location as project file.\. Set the project to Use Relative Paths = True. The setting you choose will largely depend upon your working environment. All design files are in one folder (the workspace) and its subdirectories. • Shared: Shared user mode is only appropriate for small design groups with well-defined roles for editing design files.

ipj) in the workgroup folder. and save the original files directly in the workgroup folders where they are stored. All Rights Reserved 29 . Multi User = Shared Use relative path = True Old versions to keep on save = 1 (the higher the number the more disk space required). where they make and save file changes. Design team members share the workgroup location. One or more defined. One defined at . you have access to only the number of file versions you specify in the project. You can check files in and out from the file status browser. Because the library name is stored in the reference. Note that checking out a file does not protect it from being moved. semi-isolated mode is the most powerful of the multi-user options.(. Not defined. work on. • Semi-Isolated: If Autodesk Vault is not available. and cannot access vault advanced database query and configuration capabilities. you can cancel the Options Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. changing the library name later will break library references. (Same location as project file. Design team members always have access to the most up-to-date versions when they open files or refresh them. Designers can see when someone has a file checked out and are prevented from replacing the work of one another. or work with copies of parts and assemblies to evaluate design variations. If necessary. Design team members open. Unlike the vault. Semi-isolated mode is useful when you need to isolate a part or subassembly. each needs a descriptive name that should not change. A file status browser shows the check-out status of project files that are in the workgroup and workspace locations. rather than copy them locally. If library folders are defined. Typical Shared mode project setup Included File Workspace search paths Local search paths Workgroup search paths Library Locations Not defined. Inc. copied.\. Canceling a check out makes it available to other designers but does not restore it to its state before check out.) Not defined. or deleted using Microsoft®Windows Explorer. after you make design changes and decide to discard them.

check out to revert the file back to the original file. One advantage semi-isolated mode has over vault mode is that each designer needs only enough workspace storage for files he or she is actively editing, and there is no need to update the workspace to see changes other designers have checked in. Each designer always has access to the latest checked-in changes, plus any personal changes. All design team members share a master project, which is included in their personal project, and defines the workgroup and library locations of the design project data files. Checking out files automatically copies them from the workgroup to your personal workspace for editing. Checked-out files are saved to your personal workspace after editing. Files not checked out continue to be referenced from the central work group location and cannot be saved. Design team members do not see changes to files saved by others until the files are checked in to the workgroup location. A file status browser shows the check-out status of project files that are in the workgroup and workspace locations. You can check files in and out from the file status browser. Upon file check in, the file is automatically copied from your personal workspace to the workgroup removed from your personal workspace, and the previous version moved to the OldVersions folder. The workgroup uses this new version when the file is opened or checked out in the future. Canceling a check out removes the file reservation, deletes the workspace version, and leaves the original file in the workgroup. No changes are saved to the file. When you save a file, the previous version is moved to the OldVersions folder. Any designer that already had the file open will continue to access that version until they refresh or close and reopen the file.

Master Project (shared by entire group) setup
Included File Workspace search path Local search paths Workgroup search paths Not defined. Not defined. Not defined. One defined at .\.

30

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process

Master Project (shared by entire group) setup
Library Locations When library locations are defined, each must have a descriptive name that does not change and a UNC-based location. The library name is stored as part of the references to files it contains. Library locations can be defined to be in a subfolder of the workgroup, particularly for cases such as the content library. For example, the name would be Content Library and the location would be ./Content Library. Options Multi User = Semi-Isolated Use relative path = True Old versions to keep on save = 1 (the higher the number the more disk space required).

Personal Project (one for each user) setup
Included File Location of the workgroup project using a UNC path. You can browse to the included file from the project editor or enter the path. Location of your personal workspace. Locate the personal project at .\(your personal workspace folder). Not defined. Not defined. It is inherited from the group project file. Not defined. It is inherited from the group project file. Use relative path = True Other options are inherited from the master project. • Vault: (You must install Autodesk®Vault to use this mode.)

Workspace search paths

Local search paths Workgroup search paths Library Locations Options

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

31

Creating Projects
You begin to create project files via a wizard type interface. You are prompted to fill in the relevant information such as Type of Project, Project Name, Workspace Folder, and Libraries to import from other Projects. After the initial creation is complete, you proceed to adding the required paths to the categories you will use.
Procedure

In this lesson you will learn how to create a project file.

Access Methods
You can use either the Autodesk Inventor internal project editor or the standalone project editor to create new projects. Menu Standalone Project Editor File > Projects Start > Programs > Inventor 8 > Tools > Project Editor

Process Overview - Creating Single User Projects
The following steps represent an overview for creating a Single User Project. 1. 2. In the Open dialog box, in the Project Pane, click New. In the Autodesk Inventor project wizard dialog box, click New Single User Project and click Next.

32

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process

3.

In the Name field, enter Flange-Assembly and in the Project (Workspace) Folder field, enter C:\Designs\FlangeAssembly. Click Next.

4.

If you have any projects with Libraries defined, they will appear in this list. This enables you to copy Library Paths from other project files. Click Finish to create the project. If you are prompted to create the path, click OK.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

33

Process Overview - Creating Semi-Isolated Projects
The following steps represent an overview for creating a Semi-Isolated Project. Your begin by creating a Master Project. 1. 2. In the Open dialog box, in the Project Pane, click New. In the Autodesk Inventor project wizard dialog box, click New Semi-Isolated Master Project and click next.

3.

In the Name field, enter a name for the Master Project. In the Project (Workgroup) Folder, enter a path to the Workgroup folder and click Next.

34

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process

4.

If you have any projects with Libraries defined, they will appear in this list. This enables you to copy Library Paths from other project files. Click Finish to create the project. If you are prompted to create the path, click OK.

After you create your Master Project you create a Personal Project. 1. In the Open dialog box, in the Project Pane, select the Master Project to use for your Personal Project, then click New.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

35

2.

In the Autodesk Inventor project wizard dialog box, click New Semi-Isolated Workspace and click Next.

3.

In the Name field, enter a name for your Workspace Project and enter a path for your workspace. Verify the Master Project File is listed correctly and click Finish. If you are prompted to create the path, click OK.

36

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process

Editing Projects
You can use the internal Project Editor or the Standalone Project Editor located on the Windows®Start menu to edit projects. In the Select Project Pane, select the Project to edit. In the Edit Project Pane select the category or option you need to edit. Depending on the item you edit, different options will be available on both the shortcut menu and to the right of the Edit Project Pane.
Procedure

Command Access
There are two methods available for editing projects. Menu Standalone Project Editor File > Projects Start > Programs > Inventor 8 > Tools > Project Editor

Project Pane - Open Dialog Box

When editing projects, right-clicking on the various categories or options will display the following shortcut menus.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

37

Included File Options

Open: This option opens the project file used in the included file link. Edit: This option edits the link to the included project file. Delete: This option deletes the link to the included project file.

Workspace and Library Category Options

Add Path: This option adds a path to the workspace category. Enter a named shortcut and search path in the fields below the category. Add Paths from File...: This option adds the workspace path contained in another project file. A dialog box will appear for you to select the project file. Paste Path: This option pastes a path that was copied to the clipboard. Delete Section Paths: This option deletes all paths from the category.

Local and Workgroup Category Search Path Options

Add Path: This option adds a path to the workspace category. Add Paths from File...: This option adds the workspace path contained in another project file. A dialog box will appear for you to select the project file. Add Paths from Directory...: Select this option to add the path of a selected directory including all sub-directories. Paste Path: Select this option to paste a path that was copied to the clipboard. Delete Section Paths: Select this option to delete all paths from the category.

38

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process

Multi-User Options

Off: Use this option for a single-user environment where Check-In and Check-Out capabilities are not required because the data is not shared with others in a workgroup. Shared: Use this option in a workgroup environment where multiple users may access the same data files. This option enables you to take advantage of the Check-Out/CheckIn features. When you edit any file, you will be prompted to check the file out at which time, the file will remain in its current folder but will be locked from editing by other users. Semi-Isolated: Use this option in a workgroup environment where multiple users may be accessing the same data files. When you edit a file, you will be prompted to check the file out at which time the file will be copied to the workspace defined in your project. The original file remains in its original location, but it is locked from editing until you check-in the version contained in your workspace folder. Vault: Only available if Autodesk Vault is installed.

Edit and Position Buttons
Edit and Position Buttons appear on the right-side of the Projects dialog box. Move Up: Select this option to move the selected path up in the search order within its category. Move Down: Select this option to move the selected path down in the search order within its category. Add Path: Select this option to add a path to the selected category. Edit Path: Select this option to edit the selected path.

Editing the Active Project
You must close all files in Autodesk Inventor before attempting to edit the active project.
Note

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

39

Completed Active Project File 40 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . you will create the Project file to be used for the remainder of this course. click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Exercise: Projects in Autodesk Inventor 2. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.Exercise: Projects in Autodesk Inventor In this exercise. You are creating a Single User Project file with a Workspace and Library. From the Main table of contents page.

All Rights Reserved 41 . Presentation. and Drawing environments Identify the Panel Bar Identify the Standard toolbar and groups of standard tools Understand how the menu structure is context sensitive based upon the environment you are using Identify and use Keyboard Shortcuts Identify the 3D Indicator and what it represents Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Autodesk Inventor Interface Objectives After completing this lesson. Part.The User Interface Overview Overview Overview In this lesson you will learn about the Autodesk Inventor 8 software interface. Inc. you will be able to: • • • • • • Identify the Browser in the Assembly.

Part Modeling Environment When you use the browser in the Part Modeling Environment. Procedure As you progress through this course.Position View When you use the browser in the Assembly Modeling Environment. Axes. Browser . If you select an assembly constraint.The Browser The Browser is one of your main interface components. and Center Point. Y.Part Modeling Assembly Modeling Environment . 42 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . it will display the origin folder containing the default X. It will also list all parts you use in the assembly. it displays the origin folder containing the default X. Y. and Z Planes. when you work on an assembly you use the browser to present information specific to the assembly environment. you will use the various browser modes. Features are listed in the order in which they are created. Axes. It will also list all features you use to create the part. For example. and Z Planes. While you use the Part Modeling environment. It is context sensitive with the environment you use. and Center Point. an edit box will appear at the bottom of the browser enabling you to edit the offset or angle value for the constraint. Nested under each part you will see the assembly constraints. the browser displays information that is relevant to part modeling.

This is useful when performing part modeling functions in the context of the assembly. Inc.Assembly Modeling Presentation Environment When you use the browser in the Presentation environment. it will display the Presentation views you create followed by the tweaks you use for the explosion. It is also possible button to switch the browser mode from Tweak View to Sequence View to select the or Assembly View.Note: If you select the Position View drop-down button you can select Modeling View to switch the browser to display the part features nested under the parts instead of the assembly constraints. All Rights Reserved 43 . Browser . Browser .Presentation View Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. When you expand each weak you will see the part(s) included in each one.

Browser . It will also display each sheet in the drawing along with the views you create for each. borders. title blocks and sketched symbols.Drawing Modeling 44 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . the browser displays the Drawing Resource folder containing sheet formats.Drawing Environment In the Drawing Environment.

names.Expert Mode Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 45 . This mode allows more area for the browser window. For example. the panel bar will automatically switch to display the correct tools for the context where you work. Procedure The Assembly Panel Bar is displayed below in the default Learning mode. The context sensitive design presents the relevant tools based upon the current context of your design session. Right-click anywhere on the Panel Bar and select Expert. Inc. The tool icons. Assembly Panel Bar .Learning Mode Select the Assembly Panel drop-down menu and click Expert. Assembly Panel . Note: You can also access the Expert mode. The Panel Bar switches to Expert mode. when you switch from assembly modeling to part modeling. and keyboard shortcuts are displayed. Tools are displayed with icons only.The Panel Bar The panel bar is your primary interface to the tools available while you design.

and constraints.You use the Part Modeling Panel Bar to create sketched and placed features in the modeling environment. Sketch Panel Bar 46 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . Part Modeling Panel Bar You use the Sketch Panel Bar in the modeling environment and for assembly based sketching to create 2D parametric sketches. dimensions.

Drawing Views Panel Bar Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. and animate geometry in the presentation environment. All Rights Reserved 47 .You use the Presentation Panel Bar to create presentation views. Presentation Panel Bar You use the Drawing Views Panel Bar in the drawing environment to create drawing views on the sheet. Inc. tweaks.

Drawing Annotation Panel Bar 48 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .You use the Drawing Annotation Panel Bar in the drawing environment to add reference dimensions and other annotation objects.

Toolbars There are several toolbars available for you to use. Inc. This area of the toolbar displays tools for standard file and modeling operations. All Rights Reserved 49 . Standard Toolbar . Please refer to the Autodesk Inventor help system for more information. Standard Toolbar .Appearance Tools Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. and others.Viewing Tools This area of the toolbar displays appearance related tools for controlling your model's appearance. Zoom Window. Rotate. Standard Toolbar The Standard toolbar is displayed here in three separate images. but by default only the Standard toolbar is displayed.File and Modeling Tools This area of the toolbar displays standard viewing tools such as Zoom All. Standard Toolbar . Procedure Customizing toolbars is beyond the scope of this course. It is organized into groups based upon functionality.

Menu Structure Autodesk Inventor software utilizes the standard pull-down menu structure common in all Windows application. you should take the time to familiarize yourself with the different options that appear on the menu while working in different environments.Drawing Environment 50 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . Insert Menu . Procedure As you are learning Autodesk Inventor.Assembly Modeling Environment Insert Menu . The menu structure is context sensitive based upon the environment and mode you are using.Part Modeling Environment Insert Menu .

The indicator displays your current view orientation in relation to the X. P for Place Component. Procedure Where applicable. Procedure 3D Indicator Red: X-Axis Green: Y-Axis Blue: Z-Axis Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Y. For example.Keyboard Shortcuts On the panel bar and menus. you will use keyboard shortcuts to access tools. and Presentation environments. the keyboard shortcuts will be listed for the tools as they are explained. the 3D Indicator is displayed in the lower left area of the graphics window. All Rights Reserved 51 . N for Create Component. Z axis of the coordinate system. Shortcut Keys Displayed on Panel Bar 3D Indicator While using the Assembly. Part Modeling. Entering the keyboard shortcut is the same as clicking the tool on the panel bar or menu. Inc.

part modeling. 52 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process.Exercise: The User Interface Open an assembly and explore the Autodesk Interface. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. You will experiment with different interface objects in the assembly. From the Main table of contents page. and sketching environments. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. click Exercise: The User Interface 2.

context sensitive How-To presentations. Inc. In this lesson you will learn about the different resources available for learning Autodesk Inventor. All Rights Reserved 53 . Standard Help files.Online Help and Tutorials Overview Overview Overview Autodesk Inventor software offers several types of online help and tutorial references. you will be able to: • • • • • • • Understand Help Topics Use the How To Popups Access the Help Topic containing information on the new features in this Autodesk Inventor release Access tutorials Access the Visual Syllabus Access the Help for AutoCAD Users Access Autodesk Online Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Visual Syllabus Objectives After completing this lesson. and Tutorials are all available.

Command Launch 54 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . Menu Toolbar Help > Help Topics Keyboard Shortcut F1 Use standard point and click navigation techniques to navigate the help system. You can also enter search words in the left pane of the Help Topics window. You can access the Help Topics window by using the F1 key or any of the other methods listed below. Click the icon to start the tool. The Help Topics window is only one component of the Help System.Help Topics A comprehensive Help Topics section installs by default. Procedure Access Methods You can use either of the following methods to launch the help topic. Help Topics .Main Page As you navigate to specific topics in the help system. Help Topics . icons may appear in the help topics representing specific tools.

and on the shortcut menu. It presents information to you in a manner relevant to each task. Animated Tangent Line Show Me Presentation Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. A help topic. All Rights Reserved 55 .How To Popups The Help System is context sensitive. Right-click in the graphics window. Show Me Help Window The below image represents the type of information that is available in the context sensitive How To Popups. will be displayed containing information on the selected tool in an animated sequence. click How To. Shortcut Menu Right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu. The animated sequence will play automatically and you can select the navigation buttons to navigate to specific sequence numbers. click How To. Procedure Access Methods You can use the following method to launch the How To Popups. or in some cases the Show Me help window.

Help Window What's New . Expand the category of interest and use standard point and click navigation to learn about the new features.Specific Topic 56 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . All changes are organized into main categories such as Drawings.What's New The What's New help topic contains information on all new features in the current release of Autodesk Inventor. Part Modeling. and Sheet metal. Procedure Access Methods You can use the following method to launch the What's New help topic. Menu Help > What's New What's New .

Tutorials There are several tutorials available covering a wide range of topics from Introduction to Advanced.Main Window and Working with Projects Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 57 . use standard point and click navigation techniques to select the topic of interest. The tutorials present step by step information on performing certain tasks in Autodesk Inventor. Inc. Procedure Access Methods You can use the following method to access the tutorials. From the main tutorial window. Menu Help > Tutorials Inventor Tutorials .

Information on the features you select will be presented to you in an animation.Visual Syllabus The Visual Syllabus presents topic specific information in an animated presentation.Main Window and Animated Presentation 58 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . select the main topic. then select specific feature tools available. Start the Visual Syllabus. Procedure Access Methods You can use the following method to access the Visual Syllabus. Standard Toolbar Visual Syllabus .

Use standard point and click navigation options to navigate to the topic of choice.Inventor Command Map Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Main Window AutoCAD . Procedure Access Methods You can use the following method to access the Help for AutoCAD Users.Help For AutoCAD Users AutoCAD users can use the Help Topic designed specifically for them as they make the transition to Autodesk Inventor software. Inc. Help for AutoCAD Users . Menu Help > Help for AutoCAD Users The below image represents the main window of the Help for AutoCAD Users help topic. All Rights Reserved 59 .

PDF. Procedure The Autodesk Online portal contains dynamic and new information. you will be arrive at a special area of the Autodesk. Select the Autodesk Inventor Skill Builders link.Skill Builders Link Autodesk Online 60 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .Autodesk Online Autodesk Online is an e-learning portal to training information available for Autodesk software users.com website dedicated to providing e-learning materials and tutorials for the Autodesk Inventor user. and other web-friendly formats. The information is presented via HTML. It is updated regularly. Menu Help > Autodesk Online Autodesk Online . Access Methods You can use the following method to access the Autodesk Online.

Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.Exercise: Online Help and Tutorials In this exercise you will use the online help and tutorials to create a new part with a simple sketch and features. From the Main table of contents page. click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process. All Rights Reserved 61 . click Exercise: Online Help and Tutorials 2.

click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. you will create two new Autodesk Inventor Project files. Utilize the information contained in this chapter as well as the information contained in the Help System to create the required projects.Challenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling Process Challenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling Process Print Exercise Reference In this exercise. From the Main table of contents page. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Completed Project File 62 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . then create a Personal Workspace Project and use the Included file option to include the Master Project. click Challenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling Process 2. (a) Create a new Semi-Isolated Project to be used as a Master Project.

Accessing several different resources for learning Autodesk Inventor software. The user interface for Autodesk Inventor software. The typical workflow of creating a design in Autodesk Inventor as well as different assembly modeling concepts. Creating and editing project files. All Rights Reserved 63 . through the use of keyboard shortcuts. Accessing different tools.Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • Starting a design session using Autodesk Inventor software. The concept of project files and how they are used to maintain file references between Autodesk Inventor files. The file types created by Autodesk Inventor and how to use them in your designs. Inc. and which types of projects are used for particular situations. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

64 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .

Use construction geometry to assist in creating 2D sketch geometry.. you will be able to.. Edit sketches. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Different aspects of creating sketches in Autodesk Inventor software.Introduction to Sketching Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about.. Apply constraints manually and automatically. Using the sketch coordinate system. Plan and implement constraints on 2D sketches. Applying dimensions manually and automatically. Use the Sketch Doctor to assist in fixing problems with sketches. Create sketches using the Precise Input toolbar. The sketch environment and available sketch tools. Constraining sketches using both automatic and manual 2D constraints. Options for displaying dimensions. • Create 2D sketches for use in 3D designs. • • • • • • • • • In this chapter After completing this chapter. Using the Precise Input toolbar. Editing sketches and using the Sketch Doctor to fix problems with sketches. Apply dimensions to sketch geometry. Geometric constraints and how they can be used. Apply dimensions using both manual and automatic methods. . Planning and viewing constraints that have been applied to geometry.. Rules for creating efficient sketches. Dimensioning 2D sketches. View and delete constraints that have been applied to geometry. Using construction geometry to assist you in creating 2D sketches. Placing parametric dimensions to control the size of sketch elements. Guidelines for dimensioning sketches.

Creating Sketches Overview Overview Overview The fundamental basis for all three-dimensional (3D) designs begins with a sketch. The two-dimensional (2D) geometry contained in the sketch is used to create base features as well as secondary features. Sketching using the Precise Input toolbar Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to • • • • • • • Understand the sketch environment Create sketch geometry Understand the rules for creating sketches Understand the Sketch Coordinate System Utilize the Precise Input interface to create sketch geometry Edit sketches Use the Sketch Doctor to fix sketch geometry 66 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching .

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Autodesk Inventor sketch environment Following are some important features in the sketch environment: Sketch panel bar: Displays the 2D sketching tools available. you work in an environment designed specifically for the creation of 2D geometry.Sketch Environment When you create sketches. Sketch axes: Aligned with the sketch origin indicator. Inc. the environment in which the geometry is created is always consistent. All Rights Reserved 67 . Concept A typical part generally includes multiple sketches positioned along various planes. Sketch origin indicator: Used to identify the current location and orientation of the sketch origin and axes. it is critical that you become comfortable with the environment in which they are created. Because sketches represent the most fundamental part of your design. Although the geometry varies from part to part. Each sketch contains different geometry. represents the X and Y axes of the sketch. Sketch1: The first sketch in the part. This is automatically created when you create a new part.

origin plane. or work plane. you must create them manually. and on the shortcut menu click New Sketch.Creating Additional Sketches The first sketch in a new part is automatically created. A new sketch can be created on a part face. Access Methods Toolbar Select the Sketch tool > Select a face or plane to orient the sketch. Shortcut Menu Right-click the face of a part or a work plane. Creating additional sketches 68 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . If you require additional sketches.

Fillet. Sketch Panel Bar Line Tool The Line tool enables you to create line segments on the sketch. If necessary. and Chamfer. Inc. Panel Bar Shortcut Key L Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Procedure In this lesson you learn about the most common sketch tools: Line. The 2D Sketch Panel contains all of the tools to assist in creating sketch geometry.Sketch Tools In the sketch environment. Circle. Editing tools are covered in a later chapter. refer to the Help Topics for more information about sketch tools. Rectangle. All Rights Reserved 69 . Arc. the Panel Bar automatically switches to display the available sketch tools.

On the Panel Bar. In the image sequence below. This glyph indicates the type of constraint that is being applied automatically to the line segments.Creating Lines The following steps represent an overview for creating lines in your sketch. scrub geometry on the sketch for the constraint to be applied and continue drawing the line segment. 2. 1. Pick a point to end the line segment. Continue drawing line segments as required. If the Constraint Glyph represents a constraint that you would like to change.Process Overview . Pick a point to end the line segment. the second image demonstrates by scrubbing a different sketch element. 3. and the third image shows that the constraint is now inferred to the sketch element being scrubbed. Drag the cursor in the direction of the next line segment. Drag your cursor in the direction you want to draw the line. 4. again paying attention to the Constraint Glyph indicating the automatic constraint. click the Line tool and pick a starting point for the line segment. 70 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . the first image shows that the third line segment is being constrained parallel to the first segment. Note the appearance of the Constraint Glyph.

Continue drawing line segments as required. Circle Tool The Circle tool enables you to create circles on the sketch. and click Done on the shortcut menu. Right-click in the graphics window. 6. All Rights Reserved 71 . Inc. Panel Bar Shortcut Key SHIFT+C Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.5.

1. To create a 3-Point Tangent Circle. 2. Right-click in the graphics window. 4. Drag your cursor to a location representing the outside perimeter of the circle and pick that point to create the circle.Creating Circles The following steps represent an overview for creating circles in your sketch. To create a center point circle. click the Tangent Circle tool. and click Done on the shortcut menu. 72 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . and click Done on the shortcut menu. Right-click in the graphics window. 3. Select three parts of the geometry that the circle will be tangent to.Process Overview . 6. on the Panel Bar. 5. on the Panel Bar click the Center Point Circle tool and select the center point of the circle.

• Pick a point representing the start point of the arc. click the Center Point Arc tool then pick a point representing the center of the arc.Creating Arcs The following steps represent an overview for creating arcs in your sketch. All Rights Reserved 73 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Panel Bar Process Overview . Creating Center Point Arcs: • On the Panel Bar.Arc Tool The Arc tool enables you to create arcs on the sketch. Inc. Note: Arcs are created in a counterclockwise direction so pick your start point accordingly.

180-. or 270-degree arc. 74 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . and click Done on the shortcut menu. • Right-click in the graphics window. • Drag your cursor and pick the endpoint of the arc. click the Tangent Arc tool and pick the geometry being used for the arcs tangency. and on the shortcut menu click Done. • Right-click in the graphics window. Note the Center Point Projection as you approach a 90-.• Pick a point representing the endpoint of the arc. Creating Tangent Arcs: • On the Panel Bar.

• Right-click in the graphics window. All Rights Reserved 75 .Creating 3-Point Arcs: • On the Panel Bar. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. • Drag your cursor to size the arc appropriately. click the Three Point Arc tool and pick the start point of the arc. and on the shortcut menu click Done. Depending upon existing geometry and arc size. constraint glyphs may appear. • Pick a point for the endpoint of the arc.

Right-click in the graphics window. 76 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Pick a point representing the first corner of the rectangle.Rectangle Tool The Rectangle tool enables you to create rectangles on the sketch. On the Panel Bar. 5. 2. click the Two Point Rectangle tool. click the Three Point Rectangle tool. 4. and click Done on the shortcut menu Creating a Three-Point Rectangle: To create rectangles at angles other than 0 and 90 degrees. Panel Bar Process Overview . then pick a point representing the opposite corner of the rectangle. On the Panel Bar.Creating Rectangles The following steps represent an overview for creating rectangles in your sketch. 3. Pick a point representing the first corner of the rectangle. Creating a Two-Point Rectangle: 1.

8. click the Fillet tool and enter a radius for the fillet. Then drag the cursor to size the rectangle. Fillet Tool The Fillet tool enables you to create fillets on the sketch. and on the shortcut menu click Done. 1.6. Inc. Process Overview . On the Panel Bar. Panel Bar 2D Fillet Dialog Box Radius: Enter a radius for the fillet feature. 7. Pick a point representing the second point of the rectangle. Right-click in the graphics window.Creating Fillets The following steps represent an overview for creating fillets in your sketch. Applies an equal constraint to all fillets you create during the current session of the Fillet tool. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 77 . click the Equal option. If you are creating multiple fillets of equal sizes.

2. right-click in the graphics window. 4. Continue selecting geometry or corners to be filleted. When you are finished adding fillets. 3. 78 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Pick the corner of the geometry being filleted or select each line separately. Notice with the Equal option set. Chamfer Tool The Chamfer tool enables you to create chamfers on the sketch. and click Done on the shortcut menu. Panel Bar 2D Chamfer Dialog Box This option will cause dimensions to be placed representing the chamfer. a dimension appears on only the first fillet you create.

Process Overview . On the Panel Bar. Distance2: Enter a value for the second side of the chamfer.This option will constrain secondary chamfers by referencing dimension parameters from the first chamfer created during this session of the Chamfer tool. All Rights Reserved 79 . 2. Inc. Distance: Enter a value for one side of the chamfer. Distance: Enter a distance for the chamfer to be applied equally to both sides. click the Chamfer tool.Creating Chamfers The following steps represent an overview for creating chamfers in your sketch. adjust the options as required and select a point to chamfer or select the two entities separately. 1. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Distance1: Enter a value for one side of the chamfer. Angle: Enter a value for the angle of the chamfer. In the 2D Chamfer dialog box.

Creating Centerlines The following steps represent an overview for creating centerlines in your sketch. in the 2D Chamfer dialog box. 80 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Creating Centerlines You cannot draw centerlines. When you are finished adding chamfers. Process Overview . Using centerlines in your sketch will assist in creating revolve features and placing diametric profile dimensions. click the Line tool and draw a standard line segment where the centerline will be. You then change the line segment to represent a centerline style. 4. Instead. change the options in the dialog box and continue selecting points or geometry to create additional chamfers. If necessary. 1. you can draw regular line segments using the standard Line tool.3. On the Panel Bar. click Done.

Select the line segment and on the Standard toolbar.2. The selected line will be converted to a centerline style. Inc. All Rights Reserved 81 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The centerline can now be used to place diametric profile dimensions. from the Styles drop-down list. select Centerline.

Accept default dimensions until the shape is stabilized. or polygon or you can constrain sketch geometry so that separate sketch elements come together to create a closed shape. Repeat simple shapes to build more complex shapes. Draw the profile sketch roughly to size and shape. This lesson focuses on creating closed profiles. Complex sketch geometry can be difficult to manage as designs evolve. Use closed loops for profiles. There will be times when you need to create sketch geometry that is not closed. Use 2D constraints to stabilize sketch shape before size. You can use tools such as the rectangle. Do not fillet the corners of a sketch if you can apply a fillet to the edges of the finished 3D feature and achieve the same effect.Example 82 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . There are several ways to create closed shapes. circle. Principle Following are some rules for successful sketching: • Keep the sketch simple. for example a path for a sweep feature or to create a surface. • • • • • Creating Sketches .Rules for Creating Sketches Creating sketch geometry is as easy as drawing a closed shape using Autodesk Inventor Sketch tools.

1. you can right-click the sketch in the browser and on the shortcut menu. Independent Sketch Coordinates Editing the Sketch Coordinate System The following steps represent an overview for editing the Sketch Coordinate System. Principle In most cases. All Rights Reserved 83 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. showing its current origin and orientation. right-click the sketch and click Edit Coordinate System on the shortcut menu. You must exit the sketch before you edit the coordinate system so you can change the orientation of the axes and reposition the origin. In the event you need to edit the sketch coordinate system. exit the sketch and in the Browser. The sketch coordinate icon appears. you will not need to edit the sketch coordinates but if required.Sketch Coordinate System Each sketch you create has its own independent coordinate system. Inc. This coordinate system is based upon the location and method you use when you create the sketch and is completely independent from the 3D part model's coordinate system. click Edit Coordinate System.

To change the sketch coordinate's origin. The change the direction of the X or Y axis. 84 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . 3. select the origin of sketch coordinate icon.2. click the axis then select a new edge to align the axis to. and then select a new point for the origin.

Delta Input: This option sets the inputs as a delta to the last point picked or entered. enter the desired values. In the X and ° boxes. In the X and Y boxes. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. XY: This format specifies a coordinate relative to the origin. select a data format. It will rotate the axes of the active coordinate system. All Rights Reserved 85 . The first point is relative to the origin. Subsequent points are relative to the last point picked or entered. Procedure Access Methods Use the following method to access the Precise Input tool: Toolbar View menu > Toolbars > Inventor Precise Input Precise Input Toolbar Relative Origin: This option enables you to enter coordinates relative to a point you select. enter the desired values. Y°: This format specifies a coordinate by y coordinate and angle from the positive X axis. X°: This format specifies a coordinate by x coordinate and angle from the positive X axis. Inc. It is also possible to use this tool to create sketch geometry based on relative coordinates from other model geometry. Relative Orientation: This option is used when moving faces on a base solid. Input Type: From the drop-down list. In the Y and ° boxes. This enables you to create sketch geometry at specific lengths or angles prior to placing parametric dimensions. Relative Orientation is not available while sketching. enter the desired values.Precise Input When creating sketch geometry it is possible to use the Precise Input toolbar to enter precise values or coordinates.

In the D and ° boxes. On the 2D Sketch Panel Bar. 4.) 86 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Create a new sketch. (Optionally enter offset values for the selected point. click Toolbars > Inventor Precise Input to display the Inventor Precise Input toolbar. To set your relative Precise Relative point. click the icon and pick a point on the sketch geometry. 2. 3. Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Precise Input tool.d°: This format specifies a coordinate by a distance and angle from the positive X axis. 1. click a sketch tool such as Line. enter the desired values. On the View menu.

From the Input Type drop-down list. The point is previewed. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 5. 6. All Rights Reserved 87 . Click the Delta X Delta Y button to move the origin indicator to the last point.The point is previewed. Inc. Continue to enter additional input values as required. Click to accept the position. Click to accept the point. select the desired Input Type and enter the appropriate values in the corresponding boxes.

Continue to enter additional input values as required. Right-click in the graphics window and click done on the shortcut menu.The point is previewed. Click to accept the point. 88 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . The point is previewed. 8. 7. Click to accept the point.

Sketch1 has been consumed by Extrusion1. When you edit sketches. or Hole. Browser Browser Browser Double-click the sketch. where only the features existing at the time this sketch was created are visible. Right-click the sketch and click Edit Sketch. As you edit the sketches. Editing the sketch places the model in a rolled back state. You can expand the Extrusion1 feature to expose the consumed sketch. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. Right-click the feature and click Edit Sketch. In the image below. you are returned to the sketch environment and the Panel Bar changes.Editing Sketches As you build your parametric model. Revolve. you will be creating multiple sketches. Procedure In this lesson you learn how to edit sketches. the sketch becomes consumed by the feature and appears under the feature in the Browser. The ability to edit these features is fundamental to any parametric modeling session. Access Methods The following methods can be used to edit sketches. When the sketch is used by a feature such as Extrude. the changes are applied to the features based upon those sketches. All Rights Reserved 89 . You can see each of the sketches in the Browser by expanding the particular feature(s). providing you with access to all the sketch tools initially used in creating the sketch. Note the change in appearance in the browser as the background color changes indicating the active feature.

click the Return tool to exit the sketch environment.Editing Sketches On the Standard toolbar. 90 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching .

Once the sketch has been activated for editing. you can make changes to geometry. dimensions.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for editing sketches. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 1. All Rights Reserved 91 . right-click the feature or sketch and click Edit Sketch on the shortcut menu. In the Browser. and constraints. Inc.

When you are done editing the sketch. on the Standard toolbar. 92 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Continue to make edits to the sketch as required.2. The changes in the sketch are applied to the 3D features of the part. click the Return tool to exit the sketch and return to the part model. 3.

missing coincident constraints. and open loops. Access Methods The following methods can be used to access the Sketch Doctor. Extrude Dialog Box . You click this button to start the Sketch Doctor. while other problems may require manual editing and correction. All Rights Reserved 93 . Procedure In this lesson you learn how to use the Sketch Doctor to fix common problems in sketches. While a sketch is activated. Browser In the Extrude dialog box. The Sketch Doctor can correct some problems. right-click and click Sketch Doctor. which will diagnose and assist you in fixing the problems detected. the presence of the Red Cross icon indicates that problems have been detected with the sketch. Common problems include redundant points. Sketched Feature Dialog Box This icon is available in the Sketched Feature dialog box if a problem with the sketch is detected.Sketch Doctor The Sketch Doctor is a tool that assists you in fixing common problems that can occur in your sketches. Inc.Sketch Problems Detected Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

Sketch Doctor Dialog Box 94 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Sketch Doctor Dialog Box In the Diagnose Sketch dialog box. you select the diagnostic tests to perform. click Diagnose Sketch to start the diagnosis.In the Sketch Doctor dialog box. Diagnose Sketch Dialog Box Detected problems are listed in the Sketch Doctor dialog box. By default. You select the problem to recover and click Next. all tests are selected.

Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Read the import options closely while importing geometry. Sketch Doctor Dialog Box You select the appropriate treatment option and click Finish. Sketch Doctor Dialog Box Sketch Problems Tip Most sketch problems occur when you import 2D geometry from other applications. and import only the geometry required for the sketch. Information about potential fixes is included. All Rights Reserved 95 .A problem diagnosis/description is displayed.

Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. 2. 3D Part Created Using Sketches 96 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching. click Exercise: Creating Sketches The completed exercise is shown in the following image.Exercise: Creating Sketches In this exercise. From the Main table of contents page. you create some basic sketch geometry use the sketch to create 3D features.

2D Constraints on Part Sketch Objectives After completing this lesson. For example. Inc. you will be able to: • • • • • • Understand the concept of constraining sketches Understand geometric constraints Understand how to plan constraints Show and delete constraints applied to 2D sketch geometry Use the Show All tool to show all constraints applied to a sketch Create and use construction geometry in the sketch Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. forces that line segment to always be vertical. a vertical constraint. In this lesson you learn how to work with constraint sketches. A tangent constraint added to an arc forces that arc to remain tangent to the geometry that it has been constrained. All Rights Reserved 97 . applied to a line segment.Constraining Sketches Overview Overview Overview You use geometric constraints to control the sketch geometry to which they have been applied.

Sketch Before and After Constraining 98 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . As you continue to develop the sketch. In most cases the inferred constraints are sufficient for your initial constraints. you are adding a level of intelligence to the 2D geometry. Constraints stabilize sketch geometry by placing limits on how the geometry can change as the result of constraint dragging. if a horizontal constraint is applied to a line. that line is forced to be horizontal at all times. The sketch on the left was purposely drawn utilizing only some of the inferred constraints. or dimensions. and colinear.Constraining Sketches in Autodesk Inventor When you add constraints to 2D geometry. horizontal. For example. The sketch on the right is the result of adding additional constraints such as vertical. Principle As you create sketches. you may need to add additional constraints to properly stabilize the sketch geometry. The following image illustrates the effect of constraints on sketch geometry. some constraints are inferred (applied automatically).

Geometric Constraints Procedure Geometric Constraints You can apply several different types of geometric constraints to your sketch geometry. In this lesson you learn about the different constraints available and how they can be used. Inc. All Rights Reserved 99 . The following image shows the 2D geometric constraints available from the 2D Sketch Panel. 2D Sketch Panel Shortcut Menu In the graphics window. Access Methods The following methods can be used to access the 2D geometric constraints. right-click and click Create Constraint. Each constraint type offers a unique capability and is used to create a specific constraint condition. Available Geometric Constraints Constraint Potential Sketch Elements Line Constraint Condition Created Constrained geometry is perpendicular to each other Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

Endpoint of Line. Center Point Circle. Arc Lines. Arcs 100 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Pairs of Points (including Midpoints) Lines. Point. Pairs of Points (including Midpoints) Lines. Points. Circle. Ellipse Axes Lines. Points.Constraint Potential Sketch Elements Line Constraint Condition Created Constrained geometry is parallel to each other Constrained geometry is tangent to each other Constrains two points together. Arcs Lines. Arc Line. Circles. Can constraint a line to a point Constrains circles or arcs to share the same center point location Constrains the geometry to lie along the same line Constrains the geometry to lie parallel to the X axis of the sketch coordinate system Constrains the geometry to lie parallel to the Y axis of the sketch coordinate system Constrains the geometry to have equal radii or lines to have the same length Constrains the geometry to fixed at its current position relative to the sketch coordinate system Constrains geometry to be symmetrical about a selected centerline Line. Circles. Circles. Arcs Lines.

or arc. Select a circle. 3. line. or arc to apply the Equal constraint. line. Inc. click the Horizontal constraint tool. Apply a Horizontal Constraint 1. click the Horizontal constraint tool and select the geometry to be constrained. On the Panel Bar. In the exercise portion of this lesson. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Process Overview The following steps present an overview to applying different types of geometric constraints. On the Panel Bar. click the Equal constraint tool.Applying Constraints . All Rights Reserved 101 . The selected geometry is now constrained to be Equal in size. On the Panel Bar. 2. Select the circle. 4. Apply an Equal Constraint 1. Apply a Horizontal Constraint between a point and a midpoint 1. you have an opportunity to place additional types of constraints.

Select the midpoint of an existing line. 3. The geometry is now constrained horizontally based upon the two points selected. Select a point such as the endpoint of a line or center of a circle. 102 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching .2.

5. 3. Select a sketch element to be used for the symmetry line. 2. Tip: You only need to select the symmetry line once during the current session of the Symmetric Constraint tool.Apply a Symmetrical Constraint 1. click the Symmetric constraint tool. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Continue selecting other sketch elements to apply the Symmetric constraint. Select the first sketch element for the constraint. Select the second sketch element for the constraint. On the Panel Bar. 4. All Rights Reserved 103 . Inc.

As you create sketch geometry. Therefore. delete the automatically applied constraints and apply constraints to remove the degrees of freedom. some constraints are automatically applied. constraints are automatically applied. determine how sketch elements relate to each other and apply the appropriate sketch constraints. If required. those constraints do not always completely represent your design intent. Concept In this lesson you learn how to plan constraints for your 2D sketch geometry. However. After the sketch is created. you must add constraints or delete existing constraints. Following are some key concepts regarding constraint planning. During the sketch creation process. • Analyze automatically applied constraints.Planning Constraints As you create sketch geometry. • Determine sketch dependencies. you should determine whether any degrees of freedom remain on the sketch. 104 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching .

the sketch elements update to reflect the correct size. you should constrain the sketch to prevent the geometry from distorting. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Before you place dimensions on your sketch elements. You can use the constraint-drag technique to see the remaining degrees of freedom on the sketch. When you apply constraints to your sketch geometry. Inc. you will be able to predict the effect the dimensions will have on the sketch geometry.• Use only needed constraints. It is not necessary to fully constrain sketch geometry in order to create 3D features. As you place the parametric dimensions. In some situations you may be required to leave sketch geometry underconstrained. If necessary use the Fix constraint to fix portions of the sketch. take into account the design intent and the degrees of freedom remaining on the sketch. All Rights Reserved 105 . • Stabilize shape before size. By stabilizing the geometry with constraints.

By placing dimensions on larger elements first. Some constraint combinations may distort underconstrained portions of your sketch. you can minimize distortion on the sketch as it updates to reflect the dimensioned values.• Place dimensions on large elements before small ones. • Use both geometric constraints and dimensions. By using a combination of geometric constraints and parametric dimensions. you can correct this distortion and generate a sketch that is properly constrained and meets your design intent. 106 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . It is important to understand that constraints and dimensions work together to constrain the geometry.

you will intentionally leave features underconstrained to enable them to adapt to other parts in the assembly.• Identify sketch elements that might change size. When constraining sketches. take into account features that may change as the design evolves. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 107 . leave those features underconstrained. This will allow the feature to change as the design evolves. When you identify sketch features that may change. In the case of adaptive parts.

select the constraint symbol and press DELETE. On the Show Constraints toolbar.Showing and Deleting Constraints As you create and constrain your 2D sketches. 108 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Deleting Constraints. Click the PushPin icon on the Show Constraints toolbar to leave the toolbar displayed until you close it. select the constraint(s) and delete them. Lock the Constraint Toolbar. The geometry referenced by the selected constraint will be highlighted. The Show Constraints tool enables you to view the constraints applied to the selected geometry and if necessary. or right-click the selected constraint and click Delete. On the Show Constraints toolbar. click the constraint. Procedure Access Methods The following method can be used to access the Show/Delete Constraints tool. you may need to view and possibly delete some constraints. 2D Sketch Panel Show/Delete Constraints Toolbar Viewing Constraints.

On the Panel Bar. Show Constraints Toolbar . To delete the constraint.Process Overview The following steps present an overview for using the Show/Delete Constraints tool. Show Constraints Toolbar . or select the geometry. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click the Show Constraints tool. 1. press DELETE. All Rights Reserved 109 .Temporary Mode 3. 4. Inc. Selecting the geometry will display the toolbar permanently until you close it.Locked Mode Select the constraint symbol to view the geometry referenced by the constraint. Pause over. You can lock the temporary toolbar by selecting the PushPin icon. Pausing over the geometry will display the Show Constraints toolbar temporarily until you move your cursor away from the toolbar. or right-click the constraint symbol and click Delete. 2.

Procedure Access Methods The following methods can be used to access the Show All Constraints tool. When you select the Show All Constraints tool.) F8 .Show All Constraints The Show All Constraints tool enables you to see all constraints applied to the active sketch geometry. Keyboard Shortcut Sketch Showing All Constraints 110 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Shortcut Menu Right-click in the graphics window and click Show All Constraints. Show/Delete Constraint toolbars are displayed next to each sketch element.Show all constraints F9 .Hide all constraints The Constraint toolbars will appear next to each sketch element. Select the constraint symbol and press DELETE to delete the constraint. Pause over or select the constraint symbol to highlight the constrained geometry. (Sketch must be active. Click and drag on the vertical bars of the toolbars to move them to another location.

Creating Construction Geometry The following steps present an overview for creating construction geometry. Standard Toolbar In the following image below. In this lesson you learn how to create and constrain construction geometry. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Concept You can use construction geometry as a reference for dimensions to other normal sketch geometry as well as to constrain normal sketch geometry. Access Methods Use the following method to access the Construction geometry style. 1. Create a new sketch or activate an existing sketch.Use Construction Geometry in the Sketch There may be times when you need to place geometry in your sketch that you do not want to be included in the 3D feature. To do this. and dimension construction geometry just like any other 2D sketch geometry but when a 3D feature is created. construction lines are used to position the slot from the center of the circle and along the angled construction line. Inc. All Rights Reserved 111 . the construction geometry is ignored. Sketch Containing Construction Geometry Process Overview . constrain. you create.

select Construction from the Styles drop-down list. 4. Constrain and dimension the geometry as required. 3. click one of the sketch tools to create the geometry. Continue sketching geometry as required. On the Sketch Panel Bar. 5. on the Standard toolbar. As you sketch the geometry it will be created as construction geometry. 112 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . select Construction. Converting Normal Geometry to Construction Geometry Tip You can convert normal geometry to construction geometry by selecting the geometry. To switch back to normal geometry creation. select Normal from the Styles drop-down list. On the Standard toolbar.2. 6. then on the Standard Toolbar in the Styles drop-down list.

you create and constrain sketch geometry. Using the concepts and procedures learned in this lesson. More information on these features is presented in the next chapter. Sketched features are used in this exercise.Exercise: Constraining Sketches In this exercise. Simple Part with Constrained Sketches Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. click Exercise: Constraining Sketches The completed exercise is shown in the following image. All Rights Reserved 113 . 2. From the Main table of contents page. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching. you create and constrain both normal and construction geometry.

you will be able to: • • • • • • Create various types of parametric dimensions Create and use driven dimensions on your sketch Use additional options when applying dimensions Create and apply dimensions to your sketch using the Automatic Dimensioning tool Use different formats when displaying dimensions on your sketch Understand best practices for dimensioning your sketch 114 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . While geometric constraints stabilize the sketch and make it predictable. In this lesson you learn how to create and use various types of dimensions on your 2D sketch geometry.Dimensioning Sketches Overview Overview Overview Dimensioning your sketches is a major part of constraining the 2D geometry. dimensions size the sketch according to your design intent. 3D Part with Parametric Dimensions Objectives After completing this lesson.

When you apply a parametric dimension to a sketch element. Several types of parametric dimensions are available but only one dimension tool is used to create them. in a parametric 3D modeling application. When placing dimensions. Sketch Elements with Various Dimensions Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Procedure Unlike 2D CAD applications where dimensions are simply numeric representations of the size of the geometry. Autodesk Inventor places the appropriate type of dimension based on the geometry that you select. the shortcut menu displays additional options for placing the dimension. This technology enables you to quickly change a dimension and immediately see the effect the change has on the geometry.Parametric Dimensions Adding parametric dimensions is the final step in fully constraining your sketch geometry. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the General Dimension tool: Standard Toolbar Keyboard Shortcut D The following image shows various types of dimensions that you can apply to sketch geometry. All Rights Reserved 115 . the sketch element changes size to reflect the value of the dimension. dimensions are used to drive the size of the geometry. Inc.

click the General Dimension tool. On the Panel Bar. b. Radial/Diameter Dimension: a.Process Overview . or continue placing additional dimensions. Select the sketch element for the linear dimension and follow the sequence below. Place the dimension Select the dimension and enter a new value Geometry changes to reflect new dimension c. or continue placing additional dimensions. Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu. Linear Dimension: a. Place the dimension Select the dimension and enter a new value Geometry changes to reflect new dimension c. click the General Dimension tool. Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu.Applying Parametric Dimensions This section presents the processes for applying different types of parametric dimensions. On the Panel Bar. 116 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Select the sketch element for the radial/diameter dimension and follow the sequence below. b.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click the General Dimension tool. click the General Dimension tool. Aligned Dimension: a. b. or continue placing additional dimensions. On the Panel Bar. Inc. Place the dimension Select the dimension and enter a new value Geometry changes to reflect new dimension Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu. Select the sketch element for the aligned dimension and follow the sequence below. Tip: You could also right-click before positioning the dimension and click Aligned on the shortcut menu to set the dimension type as an Aligned dimension.Angular Dimension: a. Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu. Select the sketch each element for the angular dimension and follow the sequence below. All Rights Reserved 117 . Click when the Aligned Dimension icon is displayed c. c. b. Place the dimension Select the dimension and enter a new value Geometry changes to reflect new dimension d. On the Panel Bar. Position the cursor near the geometry. or continue placing additional dimensions. When creating an angular dimension select each line at a point on other than their endpoints.

When you enter a unit suffix. With this option set. the default mode is Diameter. click Diameter or Radius to switch the default mode of the current dimension. Values shown in red indicate an improper value or format. the default mode is Radius.Entering Values Autodesk Inventor understands specific units of measurement such as millimeter. Additional Dimension Options The following list represents additional options available on the shortcut menu when you place dimensions. it must be entered in lowercase. To specify a value of 50 centimeters in the same part. For example. right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu. inch. • Linear dimension options: When you place a linear dimension to a line or 118 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . the Edit Dimension dialog box will appear automatically after each dimension is placed. right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu. you would enter 50 cm. When dimensioning an arc. and foot. • Radial/Diameter dimension options: When you place a dimension on a arc or circle. while values shown in black are considered to be valid. meter. centimeter. Autodesk Inventor evaluates the values as you enter them. Unit suffixes and parameters are case-sensitive. If your part consists of multiple units of measurement you must enter the non-default unit suffixes. For example 50 cm would be evaluated correctly while 50 CM is not valid. if the default unit of measurement is millimeters. click Edit Dimension. you would enter a value of 50 millimeters as 50 with no suffix. When dimensioning a circle. It is not necessary to enter the suffix of the default unit. • Display Edit Dimension dialog box automatically: While placing a dimension.

Inc. Dimensions Listed as Model Parameters Notice the parameter names d3. Select the arc or circle at the point where the glyph appears. Selecting the Parameters tool will display the Parameters dialog box listing the Model Parameters. right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu. • Dimensioning to quadrants: When you need to place a dimension to the quadrant of a circle. click the desired dimension type. These names are automatically generated each time a dimension is placed. If you delete a dimension. place the cursor near the quadrant and look for the quadrant dimension glyph. All Rights Reserved 119 . d5 and so on. its parameter is also deleted and the original dimension name is not used again in the current part file. d4. Dimensions Stored as Parameters Each dimension you create is automatically named and stored as a parameter in the current part file. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.two points at an angle. You can rename the default dimension names and modify their values in the Parameters dialog box.

select Driven. This option is available only if the General Dimension tool is active or one or more existing dimensions are currently selected. from the Styles drop-down list. driven dimensions are driven by the geometry. Principle You create driven dimensions with the same dimension tool used for parametric dimensions. The value of a driven dimension changes if the geometry it has been applied to changes. when you create a driven dimension. they do not remove any degrees of freedom from the sketch. However. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the General Dimension tool and apply driven dimensions. Standard Toolbar Keyboard Shortcut D Fully Constrained Sketch Containing a Driven Dimension 120 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Unlike parametric dimensions which force the geometry to change size based on the dimension value. Because driven dimensions do not force the geometry to change. you must set the dimension style to Driven. Each parametric dimension you apply reduces the degrees of freedom available on each sketch. the sketch is considered fully constrained and you are not allowed to place any additional constraints or parametric dimensions. these dimensions will be parametric by default. Once all the degrees of freedom have been removed. On the Standard toolbar.Driven Dimensions As you apply dimensions to your sketch geometry.

additional options such as tolerances. you can reference an existing dimension by selecting the dimension in the graphics window. The preceding image shows dimension d25 being created equal to dimension d24. select an existing dimension to reference. The cursor Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. if you attempt to apply a dimension that would overconstrain the sketch. with the Edit Dimension dialog box open. are available. Click Accept to create a driven dimension based on your selection.Automatic Driven Dimensions Note As you place dimensions on your sketch. All Rights Reserved 121 . Also available are tools designed to assist you in creating dimensions referenced from other features and/or dimensions. enabling you to control the display of the dimensions. Additional Options for Applying Dimensions When you apply dimensions to your sketch elements. Inc. you will be given the option to create the dimension as a driven dimension. Procedure Referencing Other Dimensions When you create a new dimension. When you want to reference other dimensions in a new dimension. The dimension parameter name is automatically entered in the Edit Dimension dialog box.

Edit Dimension Flyout Measure: Enables you to measure another sketch element or 3D feature. When you select the existing dimension. the following options are available on the Edit Dimension flyout.Flyout Options When applying parametric dimensions. The dimension being referenced can be used alone or in a formula. Edit Dimension Dialog Box . Recently Used Values: Displays a list of recently used values. Show Dimensions: Enables you to select a feature on the 3D part to display the underlying dimensions. Tolerance: Displays the Tolerance dialog box enabling you to assign a tolerance to the parametric dimension. enabling you to select a User Parameter for use in the current dimension. Select any value for use in the current dimension. This option appears only if User Parameters have been created. After the dimensions are displayed you can select a dimension for use in the existing dimension. 122 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . List Parameters: Lists the current User Parameters in a window. The resulting value is placed in the Edit Dimension dialog box.changes to indicate that you are referencing an existing dimension. the parameter name of the dimension you selected is entered in the Edit Dimension dialog box.

applies constraints to the sketch elements. Constraints: When selected. you should select the geometry based on how you want the automatic dimensions applied. Apply: Applies dimensions and constraints to the selected geometry.Automatic Dimensioning The Auto Dimension tool applies constraints and dimensions to the entire sketch or only those sketch elements that are selected. consider using at least one fix constraint or constrain the geometry to the origin of the sketch. Remove: Removes the dimensions and/or constraints applied by the Auto Dimension tool. applies dimensions to the sketch elements. Manually applied dimensions and/or constraints will affect this number. Access Methods Use the following method to access the Auto Dimension tool. Tip: When this number is 2. This will not remove dimensions and/or constraints that you applied manually. Dimensions Required: Displays the number of dimensions required to fully constrain the sketch. Procedure For best results you should apply constraints and any dimensions you would prefer not be automatically calculated. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Standard Toolbar Auto Dimension Dialog Box The following options are available in the Auto Dimension dialog box: Curves: Select the sketch elements to be automatically dimensioned. All Rights Reserved 123 . The Auto Dimension tool is intended to be used in conjunction with the General Dimension tool and manually added or inferred constraints. Although you can use the tool to dimension all sketch elements automatically by not selecting any elements and clicking the Apply button. all elements are considered for dimensioning. Inc. Dimensions: When selected. If no sketch elements are selected.

2.Done: Closes the dialog box. Notice the constraints that have been added manually. Create a new sketch and add the constraints and dimensions that you prefer not be automatically calculated. This ensures that critical constraints do not need to be automatically calculated. 124 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . click the Auto Dimension tool and select the geometry to be automatically dimensioned.Automatic Dimensioning The following steps represent an overview for using the Auto Dimension tool. On the Panel Bar. Process Overview . 1.

In the Auto Dimension dialog box. Move the dimensions as required to clean up the automatic placement. 4.3. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Use standard dimension editing techniques to adjust the dimension values as required. All Rights Reserved 125 . click the Apply button to apply dimensions and constraints to the selected geometry. Click Done to close the dialog box. 5.

Expression: Dimension is displayed as an expression. Name: Dimension is displayed as a parameter name. click Dimension Display. 126 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching .Displaying Dimensions You can control how dimensions are displayed in the graphics window by using different dimension display options. Procedure Dimension Display Options The following options are available on the Dimension Display submenu: Value: Dimension is displayed as nominal value. right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu. You then select a dimension display option. While in an active sketch.

place a perpendicular constraint instead of an angle dimension of 90 degrees. With this relationship.Tolerance: Dimension is displayed with tolerance values. For example. the other dimension changes as well. reference one dimension to the other. Inc. Guidelines for Dimensioning Sketches Consider the following guidelines when adding dimensions to your sketch: Principle • • • • Use the General Dimension tool to place critical dimensions. and then use the Auto Dimension tool to speed up the dimensioning process. Place large dimensions before small ones. For example. if the first dimension changes. Precise Value: Dimension is displayed as precise value regardless of precision setting. Consider both dimensional and geometric constraints to meet the overall design intent. Use geometric constraints when possible. if two dimensions are supposed to be the same value. All Rights Reserved 127 . Incorporate relationships between dimensions. • Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

From the Main table of contents page. Using the techniques learned in this lesson. click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching. apply a combination of parametric and driven dimensions to the sketch geometry. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. 2. 3D Part with Parametric Dimensions 128 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching .Exercise: Dimensioning Sketches In this exercise. click Exercise: Dimensioning Sketches The completed exercise is shown in the following image. you apply dimensions to a sketch.

Inc. click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching. create. Fully Constrained and Dimensioned Sketch Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 2.Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Sketching Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Sketching Print Exercise Reference In this exercise. click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Sketching The completed exercise is shown in the following image. All Rights Reserved 129 . constrain. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. you create a new part file and using the techniques and concepts learned in this chapter. From the Main table of contents page. and dimension a sketch as show here.

About the types of constraints available and what types of geometry they can be applied to. How to display dimensions Guidelines and best practices for dimensioning sketches. How to constrain 2D sketches in Autodesk Inventor. How to apply parametric dimension to 2D sketches. How to create and edit 2D sketches. 130 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Fix common problems associated with sketches. How to use construction geometry when creating 2D sketches. What makes parametric and driven dimensions different.Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • • • Basic rules for creating sketches.

Base and secondary features. Creating sketch planes. Consumed and unconsumed sketches. Sharing sketch geometry. Create extruded features using the Extrude tool. • • • • • • • • • • • • • Sketched features. • • • • • • • In this chapter After completing this chapter. Create reference geometry from existing part geometry. Cut. Edit extruded features. • • Create sketches and profiles for use in sketch features. Specify termination options when you create extruded features. Using the Revolve tool to create revolved features. Use the Sketch tool to create new sketches. The Join. Using the Extrude tool to create extruded features. Using part faces to define a sketch Application options that enable you to automatically project edges on a new sketch.Creating Simple Sketched Features Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about.. . Create revolved features using the Revolve tool. Creating profiles containing multiple closed loops. you will be able to. and Intersect feature relationships.. Specifying different termination options for extrude features Editing features after you have created them.. Edit revolved features. Use existing part faces to define new sketch planes..

you will be able to • • • • Understand the concept of simple sketched features Identify consumed and unconsumed sketches in your model Identify the two different types of profiles and options for working with closed loop profiles Share sketch features 132 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .Introduction to Sketched Features Overview Overview Overview Three-dimensional (3D) features that you create in Autodesk Inventor fall into one of two categories: sketched features or placed features. In this lesson you learn the concept of sketched features and how they are created. The term "sketched feature" refers to a 3D feature that is based on a 2D sketch. Part Created Using a Single Shared Sketch Objectives After completing this lesson.

additional sketched and/or placed features are added to the 3D model. Typical Sketched Feature Creation The image below represents a typical workflow for creating a 3D part based upon sketched features. The base sketch is created which is used to create the base feature. All Rights Reserved 133 . sketched features are 3D features that are created from an existing 2D sketch. this profile usually represents a 2D section of the 3D feature being created.Concept You create your 3D model by using multiple sketches representing various profiles of the 3D part and building on those sketches with sketch features. The result of the sketched feature can add or remove mass from the 3D geometry. you begin by first creating the sketch or profile for the 3D feature. Creation of Sketched Features Sketched Feature Attributes The key attributes of sketched features are as follows: • • • Requires an unconsumed sketch. options are available that control whether the secondary sketched features will add or remove material from the existing 3D geometry. When you create a sketched feature. Secondary sketches and features are then added to the 3D model.Simple Sketched Features As the name implies. As you add the additional sketched features. Used for both base and secondary features. For simple sketched features. Inc. After you create the base feature. Simple Sketched Features . These features serve as the basis for most of your designs using Autodesk Inventor. multiple sketches can be created and used within one sketch feature. For more complex sketched features. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The first sketch feature you create is considered the base feature.

you create a sketched feature. When you create the 3D sketched feature. the sketches are nested below the sketched feature in which they were used.Consumed and Unconsumed Sketches When you create a new part. such as Extrude or Revolve. In most cases you use this default sketch for the basis of your 3D geometry. the initial sketch is created for you automatically. After the sketch is created. to create 3D geometry from the initial sketch. Unconsumed Sketch The image below shows the initial sketch before it is consumed by the sketched feature. Unconsumed Sketch Consumed Sketches The following image shows sketches consumed by the sketched features. the sketch is considered unconsumed and can be used for any sketched feature. Consumed Sketches 134 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . the sketch itself becomes consumed by the 3D sketched feature. In the browser. Prior to this time.

Sketch Shortcut Menu The following options are available on the Sketch shortcut menu: Edit Sketch: Activates the sketch environment for editing. All Rights Reserved 135 . Create Note: Attaches a note to the sketch using the Engineer's Notebook interface. Any changes you make are reflected in the 3D geometry. Visibility: When a sketch is consumed by a feature. you could change the direction of the current X or Y axes. This option sets the visibility of the sketch to On. Any changes you make to the sketch are reflected in the 3D geometry. Edit Coordinate System: Activates the sketch enabling you to adjust the sketch coordinate system. or reposition the sketch origin. For example. right-click on the sketch to access these options. Share Sketch: Shares the sketch making it available for additional sketch features. In the browser. its visibility is automatically turned off. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you still have access to the sketch for editing and other operations. Redefine: Enables you to redefine the plane on which the sketch was created. Inc.Options for Consumed Sketches After the sketch has been consumed.

a sketch containing multiple closed loop profiles is used to create an extruded feature. you are able to select any individual closed profile or multiple closed profiles to be included in the feature. In this situation you have one sketch containing multiple closed profiles. The closed profiles in some cases may intersect each other. Sketch Containing Multiple Closed Loop Profiles 136 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . There are two different types of profiles: open and closed. Open profiles are used to create paths and surfaces and can also appear as the result of projecting reference geometry. In the bottom image.Sketches and Profiles When you create sketches it is possible to create sketch geometry that contains multiple profiles. Closed profiles are the most common and are used to create 3D geometry. you may end up with multiple closed loop profiles. Multiple Closed Loop Profiles In the following image. When you create sketched features from these types of profiles. Concept As you build more complex sketches. note the ability to select only the profiles you want included in the sketched feature.

Sharing Sketch Features . Access Methods Use the following method to share a sketch. When you share the sketch its geometry becomes available for an unlimited number of additional sketched features.Sharing Sketch Features You can reuse an existing sketch after it as been consumed by the sketched feature--this is referred to as sharing a sketch. All Rights Reserved 137 . If your sketch contains geometry that is meant to define separate features on the part.Share Sketch Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. you can share the sketch thereby making it available for additional sketched features.Procedure Under certain circumstances. sharing the sketch is an alternative to creating multiple sketches. Shortcut Menu . right-click on a consumed sketch and click Share Sketch. Shortcut Menu In the Browser.

Shared Sketch • • • The hand indicates the sketch has been shared. even after being consumed by the sketched feature. The icon is colored indicating that the sketch (and any dimensions added) will remain visible. You must manually turn off visibility for a shared sketch.The following image shows a sketch that has been shared and is being used in two sketched features. After you share a sketch. Part/Assembly Browser . Share with Caution! Tip Before you share a sketch. there is no way to "un-share" or delete the shared sketch. 138 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . be certain this is the method you want to use to accomplish your design intent.

you create some simple sketched features from a sketch consisting of multiple closed loop profiles.Exercise: Introduction to Sketched Features In this exercise. Inc. From the Main table of contents page. click Exercise: Introduction to Sketched Features 2. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. Part Created Using a Single Shared Sketch Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. All Rights Reserved 139 . You then share the sketch to make it available for additional features. click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features.

and you learn about creating and referencing sketch geometry. Completed Pillar Block Objectives After completing this lesson.Working with Sketch Planes Overview Overview Overview Every sketch you create defines a 2D plane on which your sketch geometry is created. you will be able to • • • • Use the Sketch tool to create new sketch planes Define a new sketch plane based upon an existing part face Reference existing model edge geometry when you create sketches Create reference geometry 140 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . In this lesson you learn how to work with sketch planes.

click the Sketch tool and in the browser. Procedure Standard Toolbar Using the Sketch Tool The following examples show potential uses of the Sketch tool.The Sketch Tool You use the Sketch tool to create new sketches or to activate existing sketches. The existing sketch is activated for editing. select an existing sketch. When you select the Sketch tool on the Standard toolbar. All Rights Reserved 141 . Inc. • Activate an existing sketch On the Standard toolbar. you are prompted to select a plane to create a sketch or an existing sketch to edit. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. You can select planes or sketches in the graphics window or in the browser.

• • • • To exit the sketch.• Create a new sketch On the Standard toolbar. click the Sketch tool and select a plane or face on the part. aligned to the selected face. click the Sketch tool or On the Standard toolbar. Right-click in the graphics window and click Finish Sketch on the shortcut menu. 142 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . use one of the following methods: On the Standard toolbar. click the Return button or. A new sketch is created.

the new sketch plane can be created directly on the selected face or offset from the selected face to a specified distance. Procedure Standard Toolbar Shortcut Menu Right-click on a part face and click New Sketch. • Create a new sketch plane aligned to a selected face Right-click on a face of the part click New Sketch on the shortcut menu. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Using this method. You can create new sketch planes on any flat surface of an existing part.Using a Part Face to Define a Sketch One of the most common methods for creating new sketches is to use a part face to define your sketch plane. Creating Sketch Planes on a Part Face The following examples demonstrate how to create sketch planes on a part face. Inc. All Rights Reserved 143 . The sketch plane is created on the selected face.

On the Standard toolbar. An offset dialog box is displayed. offset from a selected face 1.Click on the face and drag the sketch plane away from the selected face. 144 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .In the Offset dialog box. enter a value for the offset and click the green checkmark. The sketch plane is created offset from the selected face at the distance you specified. click the Sketch tool 2. 3.• Create a new sketch plane.

This geometry is known as reference geometry.Direct Model Edge Referencing Direct model edge referencing refers to a process in which you reference existing model edge geometry in the creation of new sketch geometry.Sketch Tab Referencing Model Edge Geometry The following examples demonstrate how to reference model edge geometry when creating new sketches. • Create a new sketch on an existing part face. When you create new sketch planes on existing model faces. Options Dialog Box . Without this reference geometry. The edges of the existing part face Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. it would be otherwise impossible to dimension or constrain new sketch geometry to existing features on the 3D part. All Rights Reserved 145 . Procedure Uses for Direct Model Edge References Following are potential uses for edge references: • • • For dimensions to new sketch geometry For relational constraints to new sketch geometry As the basis for new sketched features Application Options . the edges of the selected face are projected onto the new sketch when you create a new sketch plane on an existing face. the edges of the selected face are automatically projected onto the new sketch.Sketch Tab When you select the Autoproject Edges for Sketch Creation and Edit option on the Sketch tab in the Options dialog box. Inc.

Create new sketch geometry and use the projected reference geometry for dimensions and/or constraints. The new sketch geometry is created by projected the edges of the selected face. This icon indicates the feature is adaptive to the referenced part in the assembly. On the Panel Bar. click the Project Geometry tool and select a face on another part in the assembly. • • Direct model edge referencing in the context of an assembly: Create a new sketch on a face of the active part. Note the appearance of the Adaptive indicator.are automatically projected onto the new sketch. This concept is known as 146 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . this feature will automatically update to reflect the changes. If the source geometry projected onto the new sketch changes.

the projected geometry updates to reflect the changes in the source part. the source geometry on the first part in the assembly has been modified. As a result.Adaptivity and is covered in greater detail later in this course. All Rights Reserved 147 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. To demonstrate Adaptivity.

Adaptivity is beyond the scope of this chapter but is covered in greater detail later in this course. If the source geometry changes.Creating Reference Geometry You cannot draw reference geometry. the reference geometry will also change. Procedure When you project geometry from the same part. The only way to create it is by using the Project Geometry tool. If this option is not selected. can only be created by using Project Geometry tool or by selecting the Autoproject Edges option 148 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . it is always associative to the original source geometry. it is not associative to the original source geometry. Access Methods You can use the following tools to create reference geometry: Panel Bar Panel Bar Reference Geometry Attributes Following are some key attributes for reference geometry: • • • • • • Can be used as the basis for dimensions to new sketch geometry Can be used to apply relational constraints to new sketch geometry Cannot be dimensioned Cannot be trimmed Can be mirrored Cannot be drawn. When you select this tool. it is projected onto the current sketch plane and is created as reference geometry. you are prompted to select geometry to project onto the current sketch plane. As you select the geometry. This option is found on the Assembly tab in the Options dialog box. the geometry is associative only if the Cross Part Geometry Projection option is selected. If you project geometry from another part in the assembly. however. the reference geometry is still created.

Applications Options Dialog Box . Inc. you can autoproject geometry by hovering the pointer over the geometry to be projected while sketching. projecting geometry from other parts in the assembly will create associative (adaptive) reference geometry.Assembly Tab With the Enable Associative Edge/Loop Geometry Projection During In-Place Modeling option selected on the Assembly tab in the Options dialog box.Sketch Tab When the Autoproject Edges During Curve Creation option is selected.Assembly Tab Application Options .Sketch Tab Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Application Options .Application Options . All Rights Reserved 149 .

On the Panel Bar. Shortcut Menu .Sketching Shortcut Menu While sketching. 2.AutoProject Creating Reference Geometry .Process Overview The following procedures represent an overview for creating reference geometry. This will enable you to hover over geometry to automatically project onto the current sketch plane. click the Project Geometry tool and select the geometry to project onto the current sketch. right-click in the graphics window and click AutoProject on the shortcut menu. 1. 150 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . Create a new sketch on the existing part.

Continue sketching the required geometry as required. All Rights Reserved 151 . Tip: You may consider turning off the AutoProject option until it is needed again. Hover over the geometry to project. 2. It will be automatically projected to the current sketch plane. Begin sketching the required geometry.To autoproject geometry during curve creation: 1. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 3. Create a new sketch on the existing part. Right-click in the graphics window and click AutoProject on the shortcut menu. 4. This will prevent the accidental projection of geometry while sketching over existing part features.

Print Exercise Reference Note: Some 3D features are used in this exercise that will be covered in greater depth later in the course. click Exercise: Working with Sketch Planes 2. From the Main table of contents page.Exercise: Working with Sketch Planes In this exercise. click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. Completed Pillar Block 152 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . The completed exercise is shown in the following image. For each sketch you will be required to create reference geometry and use direct model edge referencing. you create several sketched features based upon different sketch planes.

Inc. you will be able to • • • • • Understand extruded features and how to create them Use the Extrude tool to create extruded features Understand the concept of using the Join. Cut. All Rights Reserved 153 . As you create these features you can adjust the feature relationship options for Join. After the feature is created. In this lesson you learn how to create extruded features using different termination options and how to edit the feature and profiles used to create them. and Intersect options when you create extruded features Use the various termination options when you create extruded features Edit extruded features and the profiles used to create them Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. and Intersect. Cut.Creating Extruded Features Overview Overview Overview One of the most common sketched features is the extruded feature. Index Slide Objectives After completing this lesson. you can also edit the underlying sketch profiles used in the extruded feature.

Example of Extruded Feature 154 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .Overview of Extruded Features An extruded feature is a sketched feature in which a profile is extruded to a distance specified by a value or based upon different termination options. the sketch contains multiple closed loop profiles selected to form a single extruded feature with holes. the extrusion direction is always perpendicular to the sketch profile being used. Examples of Simple Extruded Profiles In this example. Example of Extruded Features In this example. the sketch contains multiple closed loop profiles selected to form a single extruded feature. If the profile being extruded is open. you can choose between a solid or surface for the result of the extrusion. If the profile being extruded is closed. Procedure Although it is possible to taper the faces of the extruded feature. the extrusion will result in a surface.

Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Extrude tool. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu The Extrude dialog box is opened when you start the Extrude tool. Procedure Extrude Tool . Output: Specify the desired output option. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 155 . If the sketch contains more than one profile. Considered a sketched feature. Inc. you are required to select the profiles to be included in the extruded feature. Extrude Dialog Box The following features and options are available in the Extrude dialog box: Profile: Click this button to select geometry to be included in the extrusion. Solid or Surface.The Extrude Tool You use the Extrude tool to create extruded features from existing sketch profiles. If the sketch contains a single closed profile. A red arrow indicates that no profiles have been selected for the extrusion feature. extrude features require an unconsumed and visible sketch to be available. that profile is selected automatically when you start the Extrude tool.

3. Adjust the options as required and click OK. 2. Create a new sketch. click the Extrude tool. 1.Process Overview Following is an overview of the process for creating extruded features. The extruded feature is created. On the Panel Bar. Creating Extruded Features . 156 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .Direction: Select the direction icon or click and drag the preview of the extrusion in the desired direction.

click the Extrude tool. Adjust the options as required and click OK. All Rights Reserved 157 . 7. On the Panel Bar. 5. Create additional sketch geometry. The additional extruded feature is added to the part. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 6. Inc. Create additional sketch geometry as required.4.

Adjust the options as required and click OK. click the Extrude tool. On the Panel Bar. 9. 158 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .8. The additional extruded feature is added to the part.

Cut.Feature Relationship Options Join: This option joins the result of the extruded feature being created to existing part geometry. Cut: This option cuts the result of the extruded feature being created from the existing part. Note the green preview indicating material is being added. Inc. and Intersect When you create extruded features you have the ability to adjust feature relationship options to control the effect of the current feature on existing features. All Rights Reserved 159 . Concept The feature relationship options are available in the Extrude dialog box. Note the red preview indicating material is being removed. Using this option results in material being added to the existing part. Dialog Box .Join.Feature Relationships . These options are not available for the first feature of the part. Using this option results in material being removed from the existing part. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

160 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . Specifying Termination When you create extruded features. Procedure Extrude Dialog Box . Depending on the option you choose. Note the blue preview indicating an Intersect relationship. Specifying termination options enables you to control where the feature starts and ends.Termination Options Distance: This option extrudes the profile according to the distance specified. you can specify termination options for the feature in the Extrude dialog box. different interface options are available.Intersect: This option removes material from the existing part by comparing the volume of the existing features and the feature being created and leaving only the volume shared between the existing features and the new feature.

From To: This option extrudes the profile by starting the extrusion at the face selected in the From option and ending the extrusion at the second face selected. use the extend face options. If the selected termination face does not completely enclose the extrusion profile. To: This option extrudes the profile to terminate on the selected face or plane.To Next: This option extrudes the profile to the next possible face or plane. select the extend face option to terminate the feature on the extended face. All Rights Reserved 161 . If necessary. Use the Terminator icon to select a solid or surface on which to terminate the extrusion. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc.

162 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . If the part changes. the extruded feature will continue to go all the way through the part.All: This option extrudes the profile all the way through the part.

locate the feature you want to edit. Procedure When you right-click on a feature. Feature Shortcut Menu Editing Extrude Features . Because it is a sketched feature. 1. there are two potential items that can be edited: the feature itself or the underlying sketch that was used to create the feature. you are presented with the same dialog box that you used when you created the feature. The following options are available on the Feature shortcut menu: Edit Feature: Select this option to open the Extrude dialog box. Edit Sketch: Select this option to activate the sketch for editing. feature relationships. All sketch tools are available for editing the geometry. you can change dimensions and constraints. you are able to change the parameters such as distance. All changes are reflected in the extruded feature. All options used in creating the feature can be modified.Process Overview Following is an overview of the process for editing extruded features. Inc. In the Browser. and add or remove geometry from the sketch. To edit the sketch.Editing Features After you create an extruded feature. you can edit it at any time. All Rights Reserved 163 . and termination options and also reselect geometry to be included in the feature. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. the shortcut menu is displayed. When you edit the feature. Depending on the changes made at the sketch level. While editing the sketch. When you edit an extruded feature. right-click the feature and click Edit Sketch on the shortcut menu. you may be required to edit the extruded feature.

adjust the options as required to edit the feature and click OK. 3. 5. right-click the feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu. make the changes required to the sketch. 164 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . click the Return button to exit the sketch. On the Standard toolbar. In the Extrude dialog box. 4. In the Browser. Using standard sketch tools.2.

All Rights Reserved 165 . Inc. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Some initial geometry has been created. click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features.Exercise: Creating Extruded Features In this exercise. Index Slide Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click Exercise: Creating Extruded Features 2. while you will be required to create other sketch geometry. From the Main table of contents page. you will build an Index Slide part file using several extrude features. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.

Cut. As you create these features. you can adjust the feature relationship options for Join. In this lesson you learn how to create revolved features using different feature relationship options and how to edit the feature and profiles used to create them. Indexer Part File Objectives After completing this lesson. Cut. you can also edit the underlying sketch profiles used in the revolved feature. and Intersect options when you create revolved features Edit revolved features and the profiles used to create them 166 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . and Intersect. you will be able to • • • • Understand revolved features and how to create them Use the Revolve tool to create revolved features Understand the concept of using the Join. After you create the feature.Creating Revolved Features Overview Overview Overview You create revolved features by revolving a profile about an axis.

The profile is revolved with the Cut feature relationship. reference geometry. If the profile being extruded is closed. Example of Revolved Feature Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. and one centerline. You can revolve the profile at a full 360 degrees or at an angle specified. Example of Revolved Features In this example. the centerline is automatically selected as the axis of revolution. When you start the Extrude tool. If the profile being extruded is open. Inc. you can choose between a solid or surface for the result of the extrusion. the sketch contains a single closed loop profile. the sketch contains a closed profile and one centerline. the extrusion results in a surface. All Rights Reserved 167 . Procedure Examples of Simple Revolved Profiles In this example.Overview of Revolved Features A revolved feature is a sketched feature in which a profile is revolved about an axis.

When you start the Revolve tool. Output: Select the desired output option: Solid or Surface. If the sketch contains a centerline. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Revolve Dialog Box The following options are available in the Revolve dialog box: Profile: Click this button to select geometry to be included in the revolved feature. if the sketch contains a single closed profile.Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Revolve tool. A red arrow indicates that no profiles have been selected for the revolved feature.The Revolve Tool You use the Revolve tool to create revolved features from existing sketch profiles. Tip: If the sketch contains a centerline it is selected automatically as the axis. Procedure Revolve Tool . you are required to select the profiles to be included in the feature. it will be selected automatically as the axis for the revolved feature. 168 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . The Revolve tool requires an unconsumed and visible sketch to be available. Axis: Click this icon to select the line segment to use as the axis for the revolve feature. If the sketch contains more than one profile. that profile is selected automatically. Extents: Select the desired option from the drop-down list. Angle: This option enables you to specify an angle and direction for the revolution.

2. All Rights Reserved 169 . click the Revolve tool. adjust the options as required and click OK. Create a new sketch containing a profile to revolve. consider using the Centerline style on the line segment. This option is available only if the Extents option is set to Angle.Process Overview The following steps present an overview for creating revolved features. Direction: Select the direction icon or click and drag the preview of the revolve in the desired direction.Full: This option revolves the profile 360 degrees. Creating Revolved Features . If the profile is being revolved about a centerline. In the Revolve dialog box. Inc. 1. On the Panel Bar. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

170 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . Create additional sketch geometry as required. Select the geometry to be included in the revolved feature and adjust the options as required. 4. click the Revolve tool.3. On the Panel Bar. Click OK.

Join. All Rights Reserved 171 . These options are not available for the first feature of the part.Feature Relationships . Using this option results in material being added to the existing part. Note the green preview indicating material is being added. Cut: This option cuts the result of the revolved feature being created from the existing part. Using this option results in material being removed from the existing part. Cut. The feature relationship options are Join. Cut. and Intersect When you create revolved features you have the ability to adjust feature relationship options to control the effect of the current feature on existing features. and Intersect. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. Note the red preview indicating material is being removed.Feature Relationship Options Join: This option joins the result of the revolved feature being created to existing part geometry. Concept Revolve Dialog Box .

172 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .Intersect: This option removes material from the existing part by comparing the volume of the existing features and the feature being created and leaving only the volume shared between the existing features and the new feature. Note the blue preview indicating an Intersect relationship.

you can edit it at any time. you may be required to edit the revolved feature. When you edit the feature. When you edit a revolved feature. and even add or remove geometry from the sketch. All Rights Reserved 173 . Feature Shortcut Menu Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All changes will be reflected in the revolved feature. you are presented with the same dialog box that was used when you created the feature. you are able to change the parameters such as angle and feature relationships. Depending on the changes made at the sketch level. you can change dimensions and constraints. and also reselect geometry to be included in the feature. All sketch tools are available for editing the geometry. there are two potential items that can be edited: the feature itself or the underlying sketch that was used to create the feature. All options used in creating the feature can be modified. Edit Sketch: Activates the sketch for editing.Editing Features After the revolved feature is created. Inc. Procedure The following options are available on the shortcut menu when you right-click on a revolved feature. Edit Feature: Displays the Revolve dialog box. While editing the sketch. Because it is a sketched feature.

3. On the Standard toolbar. Right-click the feature and click Edit Sketch on the shortcut menu. adjust the options as required and click OK. 1. right-click the feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu. In the Browser. Using standard sketch tools. 5.Editing Revolve Features . locate the feature you want to edit. 2. make the changes required to the sketch. 4. In the Revolve dialog box. In the Browser.Process Overview The following steps present an overview for editing revolved features. 174 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . click Return to exit the sketch.

The origin Z axis is projected on the first sketch and changed to a centerline. All Rights Reserved 175 . The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Indexer Part File Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. From the Main table of contents page. you create a simple Indexer part file using the Revolve tool. Inc.Exercise: Creating Revolved Features In this exercise. You use the Project Geometry and Project Cut Edges tools to create different profiles to be revolved. click Exercise: Creating Revolved Features 2. click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.

Rack Slide Dimensions 176 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . Name your part file Rack-Slide. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.ipt. create a 3D model of the geometry described below. click Challenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched Features 2.Challenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched Features Challenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched Features Print Exercise Reference In this exercise. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. From the Main table of contents page. click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features. you create a 3D Rack Slide part using the dimensions and geometry shown below. Create a new part file and using the concepts and techniques learned in this chapter.

How to identify consumed and unconsumed sketches. Inc. How to specify termination options when using the Extrude tool. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. To use the Sketch tool to create new sketches. All Rights Reserved 177 . Different ways to create reference geometry from existing part edges.Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • • • The concept of creating sketched features and sharing sketches. How to create new sketches on existing part faces. The effect of feature relationships on geometry. To create and edit revolve features using the Revolve tool. The effect of feature relationships on geometry when using the Revolve tool. To create and edit extrude features using the Extrude tool.

178 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .

In this chapter After completing this chapter. Redefining a work axis after you have created it. • • • • • • Locate and utilize the default work features.Introduction to Work Features Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about. Creating work points. Different methods for defining work axes.. Create work planes. Control the appearance of work features. you will be able to. Redefining a work point after you have created it. Locating and utilizing the default work point. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Locating and utilizing the default work planes. Controlling the appearance of work axes.. Creating new work planes using several different methods. Redefine work features. Different methods for defining work points Controlling the appearance of work points. . Controlling the appearance of work planes Editing work planes. Create work axes.. Create work points. Locating and utilizing the default work axes Create work axes..

Control Valve with Work Planes Objectives After completing this lesson. display and use the default work planes in part and assembly files How to use the Work Plane tool to create additional work planes Identify examples of work planes Control the visibility of work planes.Work Planes Overview Overview Overview Work planes are planes that extend infinitely. You can use them to assist in creating geometry. 180 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . and completing other modeling tasks. you will be able to • • • • Locate. In this lesson you learn to create and use work planes. There are two main types of work planes: default work planes and user-defined work planes. placing constraints.

Browser Expand the Origin folder in the browser. The default work planes extend infinitely from the origin point. the initial sketch is created on one of these default planes. You can create additional sketches and/or features using the model or the default work planes. All Rights Reserved 181 . There are three default work planes. and XY plane. XZ plane.Default Work Planes Every part and assembly file contains default work planes. Access Methods Use the following method to access the default work planes. These work planes are located in the Origin folder of the Part/Assembly Browser. Inc. each representing a different coordinate plane. Default Work Planes Potential Uses for Default Work Planes Following are some potential uses for default work planes: Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The three planes represented are the YZ plane. Concept When you create a new part file.

To prevent the work plane from resizing. The following image represents the work plane size before and after creating geometry.• • • • Basis for new sketches Basis for assembly constraints Feature termination options Basis for new work features Default Work Plane . Right-click on the work plane and click Visibility on the shortcut menu to turn on the work plane visibility. • • Visibility: This property is off by default. 182 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . select this option and clear the check mark. All work planes with this option enabled are resized equally.Appearance Properties The following options are available to control the appearances of work planes. Auto-Resize: This property is on by default and enables the visible size of the work plane to adjust according to the geometry in the current file.

All Rights Reserved 183 .The Work Plane Tool You use the Work Plane tool to create work planes in the current part or assembly file. Inc. As the angle of the part face changes. Work planes are used to define planar surfaces when the existing geometry does not represent the required plane. and circular feature changes with the work plane. the work plane is created at a 30 degree angle from part face. The circular extrusion is created from the work plane extruding to meet the part face. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Work Plane tool. if you create a work plane that is tangent to a cylindrical surface with a radius of 2 mm. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut ] Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Work planes are parametrically attached to the model geometry and/or default work planes. Procedure In the image below. For example. When you create a work plane using features of existing geometry. the work plane will also change. the work plane will move to retain the tangent relationship with the cylinder. if the geometry changes. and that radius later changes to 5 mm. the work plane updates to maintain the 30 degree angle.

right-click in the graphics window and click Repeat Command on the shortcut menu. Select the feature or plane. The following steps represent an example for creating a work plane that is aligned with the Origin XY plane and tangent to the outside of the cylinder. While the Work Plane tool is active. you can activate the Repeat Command option. Process Overview . Select the second feature or plane. All work planes are created based on two or three selections.Repeating the Work Plane Tool If you need to create multiple work planes. 1. Each selection represents either an orientation or position.Creating Work Planes When you create work planes. there is no dialog box to create a planar offset work plane. the type of work plane is based completely on the geometry you select. 184 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . For example. 2. The Work Plane tool is repeated until you cancel the command.

they appear in the browser just like other parametric features.The resulting work plane is created. the Redefine Feature option is available. however they are not edited in the same way as other parametric features. Redefining Work Planes As you create work planes. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. If you right-click the work plane in the browser or graphics window. Any geometry that was based on the work plane being redefined updates to reflect the changes in the work plane. All Rights Reserved 185 . You can select this option to recreate the work plane using any valid method.

Click and drag from plane or surface 186 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .Part Face Result Selection 1 .Cylindrical Surface Result Selection 1 .Origin Work Plane • Aligned to face/midpoint between two faces Selection 2 . you select geometry and/or other work features. Concept • Aligned to origin plane/tangent to cylindrical surface Selection 2 . Each selection will define either orientation or position for the new work plane.Part Face • Offset from plane or surface Selection 2 .Release the mouse and enter an offset distance Result Selection 1 .Examples of Work Planes Several methods are available for creating work planes. Following are some of the most common methods used to create work planes. When you create work planes.

Planar Surface on Part.• Angle from face/along an edge Selection 2 .Vertex on Geometry Result Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Enter Angle Result Selection 1 . Inc.Vertex on Geometry Selection 3 .Part Face • Work plane on 3 points Selection 2 .Vertext on Geometry Selection 1 . All Rights Reserved 187 .

right-click the work plane and click Visibility on the shortcut menu.• Parallel to face/midpoint of edge Selection 2 . View Menu > Object Visibility Individual Work Plane Visibility To control individual work plane visibility. in the browser. Procedure Controlling Global Visibility You can toggle the visibility of work features and sketches by using the options on this menu. You can control the visibility of the work planes and move and/or resize them.Part Face Work Plane Appearance The appearance of work planes is controlled in a number of different ways.Part Face Result Selection 1 . Select the appropriate option or use the keyboard shortcuts. 188 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .

click and drag the work plane to a new location. When the move indicator appears. click and drag the corner of the work plane to resize it. All Rights Reserved 189 . Inc.Resizing Work Planes Place your cursor over the corner of the work plane. Resizing Work Planes Moving Work Planes Place your cursor over an edge of the work plane. When the resize indicator appears. Moving Work Planes Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features. Control Valve with Work Planes 190 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. From the Main table of contents page. you create a cylindrical control valve using both origin planes and work planes. 2.Exercise: Work Planes In this exercise. click Exercise: Work Planes The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

and completing other modeling tasks. There are two main types of work axes: default work axes and user-defined work axes. you will be able to • • • • Locate. Simple Part Created Using Work Axes Objectives After completing this lesson. display and use the default work axes in part and assembly files Create additional work axes using the Work Axis tool Identify examples of work axes Control the visibility of work axes Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Work Axes Overview Overview Overview A work axis is an axis that extends infinitely and is used to assist you in creating geometry. All Rights Reserved 191 . Inc. placing constraints. In this lesson you learn to create and use work axes.

and Z axis. Concept Access Methods Use the following methods to access the default work axes.Default Work Axes Every part and assembly file contains default work axes. extend infinitely from the origin point. Default Work Axes 192 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . Y axis. These default work axes. There are three default work axes. located in the Origin folder of the Part/Assembly Browser. The three axes represented are the X axis. each representing a different coordinate axis. Browser Expand the Origin folder and right-click on one of the default work axes.

All Rights Reserved 193 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Potential Uses for Default Work Axes Following are some potential uses for default work axes: • • • • Basis for assembly constraints Axis of revolution for circular pattern Basis for new work features Representation of centerlines on sketches Default Work Axes . Right-click on the work axis and click Visibility on the shortcut menu to turn on the work axis visibility. • Visibility: This property is off by default.Appearance Properties Right-click on an origin axis to access the following options. Inc.

All work axes are created by selecting existing geometric features or other work features. While the Work Axis tool is active. The Work Axis tool is repeated until you cancel the command. the work axis updates to reflect those changes. there is no dialog box to create an axis at the intersection of two planes. Work axes are used to define an axis when the existing geometry does not represent the required axis. you can activate the Repeat Command option. right-click in the graphics window and click Repeat Command on the shortcut menu.The Work Axis Tool The Work Axis tool is used to create work axes in the current part or assembly file. if the geometry changes. the type of work axis is based completely on the geometry you select. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut / Repeating the Work Axis Tool If you need to create multiple work axes. Process Overview . Procedure Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Work Axis tool. Work axes are parametrically attached to the model geometry and/or default work features. For example.Creating Work Axes When you create a work axis. The following steps represent some examples for creating a work axis. When you create a work axis using features of existing geometry. 194 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .

All Rights Reserved 195 . • The work axis is created at the intersection of the two planes. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click the Work Axis tool and select a Plane or Planar Surface. • Select another Plane or Planar Surface. Inc.• Work Axis at Center of Circular Feature: • • Work Axis at Intersection of Two Planes: On the Panel Bar.

they appear in the browser just like other parametric features. Any geometry that was based on the work axis being redefined updates to reflect the changes in the work axis. If you rightclick on the work axis in the browser or graphics window.Redefining Work Axis As you create work axes. Select this option to recreate the work axis using any valid method. 196 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . however they are not edited in the same way as other parametric features. the Redefine Feature option is available.

you select geometry and/or other work features. Inc. • Work Axis at Center of Circular Feature: Selection 1 . All Rights Reserved 197 .Example of Work Axes Concept Process Overview .Creating Work Axes Several methods are available for creating work axes.Plane or Planar Surface Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. When you create work axes. Following are some of the most common methods used to create work axes.Circular Feature Result • Work Axis at Intersection of Two Planes: Selection 2 .Plane or Planar Surface Result Selection 1 .

Point or Midpoint 198 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .• Work Axis Through Point/Normal to Plane: Selection 2 .Point Result Selection 1 .Plane or Planar Surface • Work Axis Through Two Points: Selection 2 .Point or Midpoint Result Selection 1 .

All Rights Reserved 199 .Work Axis Appearance Procedure Work Axis Appearance You can turn on or off the appearance of work axes individually or globally in the part or assembly file. in the browser. Inc. View Menu > Object Visibility Individual Work Axis Visibility To control individual work axis visibility. Controlling Global Visibility You can toggle the visibility of work features and sketches by using the options on this menu. Select the appropriate option or use the keyboard shortcuts. right-click the work axis and click Visibility on the shortcut menu. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

From the Main table of contents page. You will utilize both origin work axes as well as new work axes to create the additional features required for the part. click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features.Exercise: Work Axes In this exercise. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. Simple Part Created Using Work Axes 200 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . you use work axes to add features to an existing part. 2. click Exercise: Work Axes The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

you will be able to • • • • Utilize the Center Point work point when creating geometry Create parametric work points Create grounded work points Identify methods used to create work points Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Each part and assembly file contains one center point work point representing the 0. All Rights Reserved 201 . Inc. PC Speaker Base Component Objectives After completing this lesson. In this lesson you learn how to create and use both grounded and parametric work points.0 coordinate. You can create other work points that are parametrically attached to the geometry or grounded to a location specified.Work Points Overview Overview Overview Work points are used to represent a single point on the geometry or in space.0.

Isometric View of Origin Axes and Center Point Identifying the Center Point Work Point Expand the Origin folder to expose the origin work features. visibility for the center point is turned off.0 coordinate. By default. Right-click on the center point and click Visibility on the shortcut menu to display the center point.0. Located under the Origin folder in the Part/Assembly browser. Concept In this lesson you learn how to access and use the Center Point work point in your designs.Center Point Work Point Each part and assembly file contains a Center Point work point. The Center Point work point appears at the bottom of the list. Center Point Work Point 202 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . Work planes and work axes extend outward from this point. this point represents the 0.

Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click the Project Geometry tool and in the browser. expand the Origin folder and select the Center Point. Now that the center point is projected onto the sketch. The following steps describe how to reference the Center Point work point in your design. All Rights Reserved 203 . The default sketch is automatically created. Create a new part file. 1.Initial Use for Center Point Work Point It is recommended that all designs initially reference the Center Point work point by constraints or dimensions. you can create your initial sketch geometry relative to its position. 2. On the Panel Bar.

the geometry is still centered around the projected center point. This insures that when the dimensions change. 204 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . expand the Origin folder and select it. Center Point Visibility Note You do not need to turn on the visibility of the center point to reference it in your design features. To project the center point. the sketch geometry stays in the same position relative the origin center point. This technique also positions your geometry relative to the other origin work planes and axes for later use. Next add constraints and/or dimension referencing the center point work point.3. After changing the dimensions on the sketch. in the browser.

Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut . Either method creates a work point that is parametrically attached to the geometry or other work features. While the Work Point tool is active. If this geometry changes. Several methods are available for creating these work points. the work point changes accordingly. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 205 . Procedure Work points are used as construction geometry to assist in the creation of other geometry and features. you can activate the Repeat Command option. Repeating the Work Point Tool If you need to create multiple work points. Potential Uses for Work Points Following are some potential uses for work points: • • • • Basis for assembly constraints Projection onto sketches Basis for new work features Creation of 3D sketches by drawing lines between work points Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Work Point tool.The Work Point Tool You use the Work Point tool to create parametric construction points on part features. right-click in the graphics window and click Repeat Command on the shortcut menu. The Work Point tool will be repeated until you cancel the command.

• Creating a work point on a vertex The work point is created on the selected vertex On the Panel Bar. The following steps represent some examples for creating a work points.Process Overview . click the Work Point tool and select a vertex on the part • Creating a work point the midpoint of an edge The work point is created on the midpoint of the selected edge On the Panel Bar.Creating Work Points Several methods are available for creating work points. The work point position is determined by the geometry or other work features that are selected. click the Work Point tool and select the of an edge 206 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .

All Rights Reserved 207 . Any geometry that was based on the work point being redefined updates to reflect the changes in the work point. click the Work Point tool and select an edge or axis Redefining Work Points As you create work points.• Creating a work point at the intersection of a edge and plane Select a plane or surface The work point is created at the intersection of the edge and plane On the Panel Bar. they appear in the browser just like other parametric features. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. the Redefine Feature option is available. however they are not edited in the same way as other parametric features. Selecting this option enables you to recreate the work point using any valid method. If you right-click on the work point in the browser or graphics window. Inc.

grounded work points can be placed anywhere in 3D space. Procedure After the grounded work points position has been set. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut . the work point can be moved and/or rotated in any direction. grounded work points remain in their set position until manually moved. you must select existing geometry for the initial placement. and can be used in the same way as a standard work point.Grounded Work Points Unlike standard work points which must be placed somewhere on the geometry or at an intersection of geometry and/work features. Grounded work points differ from standard work points in that they are not parametrically attached to the model geometry. When you execute the Grounded Work Point tool. The interface in the dialog box changes depending on which type of transformation you are doing on the grounded work point. however after the initial placement is selected. 3D Move/Rotate Dialog Box 208 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . Unlike standard work points which update their position to reflect changes in model geometry. 3D Move/Rotate Dialog Box After you select the initial location for the grounded work point. you are presented with the 3D Move/Rotate dialog box. it appears in the graphics window the same as a standard work point. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Grounded Work Point tool.

2. Grounded Work Points . 1.The image above describes the transformation options when moving a grounded work point. Inc. All Rights Reserved 209 . On the Panel Bar. The work point triad appears at the selected location. click the Grounded Work Point tool and select a vertex or other work point to define the initial position. When you select a Triad element for a move transformation. When you select an axis element on the Triad.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating grounded work points. the fields available in the dialog box are based on the triad element selected. the dialog box changes to enable you to input or drag an angle value. you must select an element of the triad according to the Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. To transform the grounded work point.

and then the angled edge on the part is selected. the triad Y Axis is selected. In this image. Select the Redefine Alignment or Position option to realign the triad. 3. Select the More tab to see additional options.transformation desired. 210 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . The previous steps results in the triad being aligned to the selected edge.

In this image. the triad Y axis arrow element is selected enabling you to move the work point along the Y axis by entering a value or clicking and dragging the distance in the graphics window. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 211 . 5. However. Inc.4. The work point is displayed in the graphics window just like a standard work point. note the slightly different icon for grounded work points in the browser. Click Apply or OK to create the work point at the current location.

1. right-click on the grounded work point and click 3D Move/Rotate on the shortcut menu. in the 3D Move/Rotate dialog box select the More tab and then select the Move Triad Only option. In the image below. To move the triad only. In the browser. enabling you to transform the work point from a point other than its current position. The following steps represent an overview for using the 3D Move/Rotate dialog box to transform an existing grounded work point. where a standard work point exists. the triad is being relocated to the center of the part. 2. 212 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . you have options to redefine or move/rotate the work point. This would enable you to move or rotate the grounded work point from the new location. Select the Redefine alignment or position option and select an element of the triad.Moving and Rotating Grounded Work Points . Redefining a work point is the same as redefining other work features.Process Overview After you create the grounded work point.

Clear the Move Triad Only option and click the Transform tab. Select an axis element on the triad and enter or drag and angle of rotation. Inc. All Rights Reserved 213 . Click Apply or OK to position the grounded work point at the current location.3. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

Plane or Face 214 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .Additional Examples of Work Points Following are some additional methods for creating work points. Concept • Work point at the intersection of a line or axis and a surface: Selection 2 .Curve Result Selection 1 .Line or Axis • Work point at the intersection of a plane and a curve: Selection 2 .Surface Result Selection 1 .

From the Main table of contents page. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. Inc. you create a PC speaker base component by using sketched features and work points. the sketch geometry has already been created. click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features. All Rights Reserved 215 . 2. click Exercise: Work Points The completed exercise is shown in the following image. PC Speaker Base Component Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. To save time.Exercise: Work Points In this exercise.

click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features. Offset-Rod-Guide 216 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . You create different types of work features. click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Work Features The completed exercise is shown in the following image. 2. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. and hole features.Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Work Features Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Work Features Print Exercise Reference In this exercise you create the Offset-Rod-Guide part by using the concepts and procedures you learned in this chapter. From the Main table of contents page. sketched features.

How to create new work points. both parametric and grounded. Y How to redefine and control the appearance of work axes in your model. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. How to redefine and control the appearance of work points in your model. How to use the default center point work point. Inc. How to use the default work axes as well as create new work axes. All Rights Reserved 217 . How to create new work planes using different methods to define them.Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • How to locate and utilize the default work planes contained in every part and assembly file. How to control the appearance of work planes in your part and assembly files.

218 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .

Apply face drafts to a part model by using the Face Draft tool. you will be able to. Using the Hole and Thread tools. Create and use custom color styles on a part model. Adding Face Drafts to a model. Representing external and/or internal threads on a part. Setting the draft angle and pull direction. Applying custom color styles to a part model. Use the options on each tab of the Fillet dialog box to control how a fillet is created. Create and edit shell features to remove material from a part. Creating rectangular and circular patterns of features on your part. • • • • • • • • • • • Creating and editing Fillet features. Create and edit thread features on your part by using the Thread tool. The three different methods for defining chamfer features. Create and edit chamfer features.. Create and edit hole and thread features. • • • • In this chapter After completing this chapter.. • • • • • .Introduction to Placed Features Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about. Creating Shell features to remove material from your part model. • • Create and edit fillet features. Create and edit rectangular and circular patterns.. Use the options contained in the Shell dialog box.. Creating and editing chamfer features. Different types of fillets that can be created. Use the three available methods for creating chamfer features.

you will be able to • Use the Fillet tool to create constant and variable radius fillets 220 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . In this lesson you learn how to create both constant and variable radius fillets.Fillet Features Overview Overview Overview Fillet features are among the most widely used features on any three-dimensional (3D) part. Pillar Block with Fillets Objectives After completing this lesson. The most common type of fillet feature is a constant radius fillet. however certain situations may call for the use of variable radius fillets. Fillets are commonly used when parts are designed to remove sharp edges and reduce the potential of stress cracking. They can exist on geometry in various sizes and shapes. and also for aesthetic purposes.

Constant Tab Edge Sets: An edge set consists of selected edges and a radius value. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Edges: Displays the number of edges selected for this edge set. The arrow icon indicates you are in the selection mode and can continue to select the required edges. Procedure Before and After Fillet Features Access Methods You can use the following methods to access the Fillet tool. All Rights Reserved 221 .The Fillet Tool You use the Fillet tool to create fillets and rounds on existing 3D geometry. You can create both constant radius and variable radius fillets with the Fillet tool. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut SHIFT+F Constant Radius Tab Fillet Dialog Box . Inc.

• Edge: Enables you to select or remove individual edges for the fillet. select the edges to be removed. they are all treated as one fillet feature. 222 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . • Loop: Enables you to select or remove the edges of a closed loop on a face. To remove selected edges from the edge set. Select mode area: Determines how edges are selected. select the appropriate edge set in the dialog box. The pencil icon indicates that the radius value is being edited. You cannot select additional edges until you select the edges field of the edge set. • Feature: Enables you to select or remove all edges of a feature at once. Click to add: Select this area of the dialog box to create a new edge set.Radius: Specify a value for the radius of the fillet for each edge set. then while holding the CTRL or SHIFT key. Each edge set consist of selected edges and a specific radius. Although each edge set can have a different radius value.

The manually selected edges are not included in the new edge set. Variable Radius Tab Fillet Dialog Box . If some edges have already been selected. The manually selected edges are not included in the new edge set. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. You cannot remove individual edges from the All Fillets edge set. Inc. a new edge set is created for the remaining edges. You cannot remove individual edges from the All Rounds edge set. If some edges are already selected. All Rights Reserved 223 . a new edge set is created for the remaining edges. All Rounds: Select this option to automatically select all convex edges and corners.All Fillets: Select this option to automatically select all concave edges and corners.Variable Tab Edges: Select the edge to place a variable radius fillet. Only one edge is allowed per selection. Use the Click to Add area for additional edges.

Smooth radius transition: Select this option to gradually blend the radius between points. . Position: Specify a position along the selected edge for the selected point. On Off 224 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . Select additional points along the edge for more control over the variable radius.25 represents a distance 25% of the length of the edge from the start point. Clear this option to create fillets with a linear transition between the points. For example.Point: List the start point and endpoint of the selected edge. Values represent the percentage from the start point. The point selected in the dialog box is highlighted on the edge. Radius: Enter a radius value for the selected point.

The following images represent the result of using the Setbacks tab. using the Setbacks tab is optional. The value specified represents a distance along the selected edge from the vertex. Inc.Setbacks Tab Vertex: Select the vertex of three selected edges. All Rights Reserved 225 .Setbacks Tab Fillet Dialog Box . Not Using Setbacks Using Setbacks Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Edge/Setback: Select each edge and specify a setback value for the edge. When you create fillets on three edges that meet at a vertex.

Fillet Dialog Box . 226 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . If this option is not selected.Options To access the following options. If this option is selected.Expanded Roll along sharp edges: This option sets the solution method for the fillet when conditions would cause adjacent edges to be extended in order to maintain the radius.Fillet Dialog Box . the fillet radius varies when necessary to preserve the adjacent faces. click the [>>] button to expand the Fillet dialog box. the fillet radius remains constant and adjacent edges are extended as required to maintain the radius. Rolling ball where possible: This option sets the corner style for the fillets.

the cut feature would intersect the fillet feature.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating constant radius fillet features. in the graphics window. features that intersect the fillet feature are checked and their intersections are calculated.Automatic Edge Chain: When this option is selected. 1. click the Fillet tool. Create an edge set for each different radius. Feature Intersecting Fillet Creating Constant Radius Fillets . If this option is not selected. 2. Only the selected edge is calculated during the fillet operation. all edges tangent to the selected edge are selected automatically. select the edges to be filleted and specify a radius for each edge set. Inc. Editing the fillet feature and enabling the Preserve All Features option fixes the problem and the fillet and cut features remain valid. The first edge set contains two edges to receive a 2 mm fillet and the second set contains three edges to receive a 1 mm fillet. An error results when creating the fillet feature. On the Panel Bar. In the following images. All Rights Reserved 227 . Preserve All Features: When this option is selected. With the Fillet dialog box displayed. In the image below. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. features that intersect with the fillet are not calculated. two edge sets have been created.

3.

Click OK to create the fillet feature. Note in the browser only one fillet feature appears even though five edges were filleted in this example.

Creating Variable Radius Fillets - Process Overview
The following steps represent an overview for creating variable radius fillet features. 1. 2. On the Panel Bar, click the Fillet tool. With the Fillet dialog box displayed, select the Variable tab, and in the graphics window, select the edge(s) to apply the variable radius fillet. In the Fillet dialog box, click the Start point to modify and in the Radius field enter the radius for the Start point then click the End point to modify the radius End point.

228

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features

3.

To add an additional point along the selected edge, drag the cursor along the selected edge and left click to add the point.

4.

After the additional point(s) is added, in the Radius box specify a radius for the fillet at the selected point and in the Position box specify a position along the edge for the new point.

5.

Click OK to create the fillet.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

229

Editing Fillet Features
After you have created a Fillet feature, you can edit it using the same dialog box. In the browser, right-click the Fillet feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu. The Fillet dialog box is displayed enabling you to change the fillet parameters, add or remove selections, and change options.

230

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features

Exercise: Fillet Features
In this exercise, you create fillet features on the existing Pillar-Block-Rev-2 component. You will create both constant and variable radius fillets.
Print Exercise Reference

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:
1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features, click Exercise: Fillet Features

2.

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Pillar Block with Fillets

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

231

Chamfer Features
Overview Overview

Overview
You can place chamfer features on parts to serve different purposes from functional to aesthetic. Chamfers can exist on parts in various sizes and angles. In this lesson you learn how to create and edit chamfer features.

Rod-Bearing-Mount Complete with Chamfers

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to • Use the Chamfer tool to create and edit chamfers

232

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features

The Chamfer Tool
You use the Chamfer tool to add chamfer features to edges on your part. These features, like other features, are fully parametric and easily editable after you create them. When you create chamfer features, you can choose from three different methods which determine how the chamfer is specified. With any of the methods, the end result is the replacement of the selected edge(s) with a face(s) at an angle specified either directly or indirectly through the use of distances.
Procedure

Before and After Chamfer Features

Access Methods
Use the following methods to access the Chamfer tool. Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut

SHIFT+K

When you use any of the above listed methods to access the Chamfer tool, the following options are available. There are three methods for creating chamfers, Single Distance, Distance/Angle, and Distance/Distance. Each method presents different options in the Chamfer dialog box.

Chamfer Dialog Box - Single Distance Option

Edges: Select the edges to be chamfered

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

233

Distance: Specify a distance for the chamfer. The distance is applied to both sides of the selected edge resulting in a 45-degree chamfer.

Chamfer Dialog Box - Distance/Angle Option

Edges: Select the edge(s) to be chamfered. This option is disabled until you select a face. The edge(s) selected must be adjacent to the selected face. Face: Select a face adjacent to the edge you are chamfering. The angle is measured from this face. Distance: Specify a distance for the chamfer. The distance is measured from the selected edge along the selected face. Angle: Enter an angle for the chamfer. The angle is measured from the selected face.

Chamfer Dialog Box - Distance/Distance Option

Edge: Select the edge to be chamfered. When you use this method, only one edge can be chamfered at a time. Click this button to flip the sides of the selected edge for calculating Distance1 and Distance2. Distance1: Specify the first distance of the chamfer. This distance is measured along one of the adjacent faces. Distance2: Specify the second distance of the chamfer. This distance is measured along the opposite adjacent face.

234

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features

You can expand the Chamfer dialog box by clicking the [>>] button. Expanding the Chamfer dialog box presents the following options.

Chamfer Dialog Box - Expanded Area

Edge Chain: The options control how the edges are selected. The edge selected and all tangentially connected edges. Only the edge selected. Setback: This option is available only when using the single distance method. When chamfering three edges that meet at a corner, this option determines the result of the corner.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

235

Creating and Editing Chamfer Features - Process Overview
The following steps represent an overview for creating and editing chamfer features. 1. 2. On the Panel Bar, click the Chamfer tool. In the Chamfer dialog box, select the desired method to create the chamfer. • For a single distance chamfer, select the edge(s) to be chamfered, enter a distance for the chamfer and click OK.

The resulting chamfer is created

236

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features

For the Distance/Angle method, select the Distance/Angle option. Select the face, and then select the edge(s) to be chamfered. Enter a distance and angle for the chamfer and click OK.

The resulting chamfer is created

For the Distance/Distance method, select the Distance/Distance option. Select the edge to be chamfered. Enter distance values in the Distance1 and Distance2 fields.

Optionally flip the direction of the chamfer by clicking the Flip Direction icon.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

237

The resulting chamfer is created.Click OK to create the chamfer. The Chamfer dialog box is displayed enabling you to edit the feature the same way it was created. Editing Chamfer Features After the chamfer feature is created. it will appear in the browser. 238 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . Right-click the feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu.

Exercise: Chamfer Features In this exercise. you will add chamfer features to an existing part. you will edit the chamfer features and view the result. From the Main table of contents page. click Exercise: Chamfer Features 2. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. After the features have been created. Rod-Bearing-Mount Complete with Chamfers Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. All Rights Reserved 239 . click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features.

you will be able to • • Use the Hole tool to create and edit hole features Use the Hole tool to create internal thread features and use the Thread tool to create external thread features 240 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . In this lesson you learn how to use the Hole tool to create parametric hole features and how to use the Thread tool to create parametric thread features on existing geometry. You use the Thread tool to place both internal and external thread features on the part. they do require an unconsumed sketch representing the center point locations for the holes.Hole and Thread Features Overview Overview Overview Hole features enable you to create parametric holes on your part. Although Hole features are considered to be placed features. Hydraulic Valve Component Objectives After completing this lesson.

Procedure When you create holes using the Hole tool. the endpoints of sketched lines. countersink. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Keyboard Shortcut H Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Although you can create holes by extruding a circle with a Cut feature relationship. Part with Various Types of Holes Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Hole tool. When you start the Hole tool. and countersunk holes. the Hole tool provides greater flexibility in the variations and types of holes. and threads. such as counterbore. Additional options for the drill point and thread options are also available. rather than having to manually edit or create geometry to achieve the same result. you must create a sketch containing the hole center points. you are presented with different options for the type of hole being created.The Hole Tool You use the Hole tool to create parametric hole features on parts. You can create standard drilled holes. or points projected from other geometry in the part. All Rights Reserved 241 . You can create center points using the Point/Hole Center sketch tool. counterbored holes. With the Hole tool you can create the various hole types in a single dialog box. Inc.

Type: Click the button representing the desired hole type: drilled. Other acceptable points include endpoints of lines. Click this button to flip the direction of the hole. select the thread type. You can also clear hole centers from the selection set by holding the CTRL key and selecting the center points. • Optionally specify an angle other than the standard 118-degree drill point. the center points will be selected automatically. If you create the sketch using the Point/Hole Center objects. Drill Point: Select either a flat bottom drill or standard tapered drill point. 242 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features .Holes Dialog Box . Thread Type: From the drop-down list. To: This option enables you to specify a face or plane to terminate the hole. projected centerpoints of circles and arcs. Termination: Select one of the following Termination types: • • • Distance: This option enables you to specify a depth for the hole in the preview area of the dialog box. Through All: This option enables the hole to go all the way through the part. and countersink. Tapped: This option enables tapped threads in the hole and expands the Hole dialog box. and projected work points.Expanded The Holes dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Centers: Select the center points to use for the hole(s). counterbore.

Left Hand: Select this option for a left-hand thread. On the Standard toolbar. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. select the Class of thread. Major: Creates the hole using the Major Diameter of the selected thread size. If this option is not selected. select the thread pitch. click Return to exit the sketch. • • • • Minor: Creates the hole using the Minor Diameter of the selected thread size.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating and editing holes.Full Depth: This option creates the threads at the full depth of the hole. Diameter: Select the actual diameter used to create the hole. 1. All Rights Reserved 243 . Right Hand: Select this option for a right-hand thread. Create a new sketch containing the center point location for the hole features. you must specify a thread depth in the preview area of the dialog box. Pitch: Creates the hole using the Pitch diameter of the selected thread size. Creating and Editing Holes . Tap Drill: Creates the hole using the Tap Drill diameter of the selected thread size. Nominal Size: From the drop-down list. Pitch: From the drop-down list. Available pitches are based on the selected Nominal Size. 2. Class: From the drop-down list. select the nominal hole size.

4.3. If you use the Point/Hole Center sketch object. Click OK to create the hole(s). On the Panel Bar. Remember. 244 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . In some situations it may be easier to draw construction line segments to locate the center points of the holes. On the Standard toolbar. the endpoints of lines can be used to locate hole features. the hole centers will be automatically selected. Adjust the options in the dialog box depending on the type of hole(s) you need to create. click the Hole tool. click Return to exit the sketch.

Note the bitmap representing a threaded hole. The bitmap will change according to the thread specification. thus preventing an interference being returned between the fastener and the hole. Inc. Fine threads will appear fine while coarse threads appear coarse. Left-hand versus right-hand threads are also depicted correctly. Click OK to create the threaded hole. click the Hole tool and then select the endpoints of the line segments. In the image below the endpoints are being selected and the Tapped option is being used. Select the Thread type from the drop-down list and adjust the other thread options as required. All Rights Reserved 245 .5. On the Panel Bar. set the Diameter option to Major. Preventing Interference Between Holes and Fasteners Tip In the Threads area. This creates the hole at the major diameter of the thread. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

therefore. Threads are considered a placed feature. 246 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features .Location Tab The Location tab in the Thread Feature dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Face: Click the icon to select the face(s) to apply thread features.Thread Features The Thread tool enables you to create thread features on external and internal surfaces. Many of the same options available for internal threads using the Hole tool are also available when you use the Thread tool. Procedure Example of External Thread Features Access Methods Use the following method to access the Thread tool. All that is required is existing cylindrical surfaces to apply the thread feature. Panel Bar Thread Feature Dialog Box . the Thread tool does not require an unconsumed sketch.

Inc. Full Length: Select this option to apply the thread feature to the entire length of the selected face. Nominal Size: The nominal thread size is automatically selected based upon the diameter of the selected face.Display in Model: Select this option to display the thread bitmaps on the model. Thread Feature Dialog Box . Selecting a nominal size other than the size automatically selected may result in an error when you click OK. Left Hand: Select this option to generate a left hand thread. If this option is not selected. Class: Select the appropriate thread class from the drop-down list. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. the following options become available. Click this button to flip the direction of the thread feature. All Rights Reserved 247 . When this option is not selected.Specification Tab The Specification tab in the Thread Feature dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Thread Type: Select the required thread type. • Length: Specifies the length of the thread feature on the selected face. Pitch: Select the appropriate thread pitch from the drop-down list. • Offset: Specifies the distance from the start face of the thread feature. the thread feature is created but is not displayed on the geometry. Right Hand: Select this option to generate a right hand thread.

Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating external thread features using the Thread tool. On the Specification tab. you can right-click the thread feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu to edit the feature using the same dialog box used in creating the feature. Click OK to create the thread feature. adjust the Thread Length options as required. click the Thread tool and select a cylindrical face on the part. Just like other parametric features. 248 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . 1.Creating Thread Features . The thread feature appears on the model geometry as well as in the browser. On the Panel Bar. On the Location tab. select the appropriate thread type and adjust the other settings as required by your design intent. 2.

All Rights Reserved 249 . From the Main table of contents page. click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Inc. click Exercise: Hole and Thread Features 2.Exercise: Hole and Thread Features In this exercise. You then use the Thread tool to add thread features to the component. You will use the Hole tool to add the necessary hole features. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. Hydraulic Valve Component Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you open the Hyd-Valve-Housing part file and create new hole features.

Complete Part Containing Shell Features Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to: • Use the Shell tool to create shelled features 250 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . By using shell features. you can create the overall shape of your part and then create a cavity in the part by specifying a wall thickness for the faces. In this lesson you learn how to create and edit shell features.Shell Features Overview Overview Overview You use shell features to remove material from existing solid features.

One key advantage to using the Shell tool is that you can create differing wall thickness for each face of the part. With the Shell tool. Inc.The Shell Tool You use the Shell tool to create shelled features on existing solid geometry. Procedure Before and After Shell Feature Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Shell tool. Panel Bar Shell Dialog Box Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Generally. you select at least one face on the part to be removed from the shell feature leaving the remaining faces as the shell walls. All Rights Reserved 251 . you can remove material from an existing part and create a cavity in the part by specifying a wall thickness for the faces.

Direction: Click one of the direction buttons. Creating Shell Features . If you do not remove any faces from the shell feature. Thickness: Specify value for the wall thickness. On the Panel bar. Select the face(s) and specify a unique wall thickness for the face.Remove Faces: Click this icon to select the face(s) to remove from the shell feature. In the Thickness box enter a wall thickness. Create a part representing the overall shape required. • Inside: The thickness is applied to the inside of the existing faces. This value overrides the default thickness for the selected face(s) only.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating shell features. • Outside: The thickness is applied to the outside of the existing faces. click the Shell tool and select the faces to remove from the shell operation. The remaining faces serve as walls for the shell feature. 1. Unique face thickness: Select the Click to Add area of the dialog box to create unique face thicknesses for the shell feature. it will result in a cavity in the part with no open faces. 252 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . 2. • Both: Half of the thickness is applied to each side of the face.

click the [>>] button to expand the dialog box and select the Click to Add area and select the face(s) to assign a unique wall thickness. To assign unique wall thicknesses. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 253 . Inc. Under Unique Face Thickness. specify a thickness for the selected face(s). The shell feature is created.3. Click OK to create the shell feature.

Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.Exercise: Shell Features In this exercise. You will then edit the shell feature to include unique wall thicknesses on different features. applying a common wall thickness to all faces. Complete Part Containing Shell Features 254 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . From the Main table of contents page. click Exercise: Shell Features 2. you will create a shell feature for the part.

There are two types of patterns: Rectangular and Circular. When you pattern a feature. If the original feature changes. you are creating parametric copies of that feature. In this lesson you learn how to create and edit Rectangular and Circular Pattern features. Completed Face Plate with Patterned Features Objectives After completing this lesson. Each type offers different options for creating the pattern. Inc. you will be able to • • Create and edit rectangular patterns Create and edit circular patterns Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Pattern Features Overview Overview Overview Pattern features are used to parametrically duplicate selected features. All Rights Reserved 255 . the patterned features update to reflect those changes.

The Rectangular Pattern Tool You use the Rectangular Pattern tool to duplicate one or more features in a rectangular pattern. You can pattern a feature along one or two directions and/or paths. they are associative to the original feature. so any changes in the original feature are reflected in the pattern occurrences. Example of Rectangular Patterns Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Rectangular Pattern tool. Procedure When you create these patterns. There are several options to control how the feature(s) will be patterned. with options to control feature spacing. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut SHIFT+R 256 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features .

Curve Length: Disables the Distance field and divides the curve length by the number of occurrences.Rectangular Pattern Dialog Box . This value represents either total distance of the pattern or spacing between each feature. Start: Sets the start point for the first occurrence. Distance: Distance value represents the total pattern distance. This number includes the original feature. Inc. This can be the edge of a part or a 2D sketch representing the path for the pattern. Use the Flip Direction button to flip the path direction. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Direction 1: Path: Select the path for Direction 1. Pattern can start at any selected point. Enter the number of occurrences for the pattern. All Rights Reserved 257 . Direction 2: This column is optional and contains the same options as Direction 1.Expanded The Rectangular Pattern dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Features: Select the feature(s) to be patterned. Select one of the following options from the drop-down list: Spacing: Distance value represents the spacing between each occurrence. Enter a value for the pattern distance.

Located under the pattern feature. Browser Appearance of Rectangular/Circular Patterns When you create patterns. Identical: Occurrence orientation is identical to the first feature. The first Occurrence represents the initial feature used in the pattern followed by the number of occurrences created. Adjust to Direction 1 or Direction 2: Occurrences will be rotated as the path changes directions. you will find any sketches used as a path. along with a folder containing the features used in the pattern. If you expand a rectangular or circular pattern. Adjust to Model: This method enables each occurrence termination to be calculated. 258 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . Right-click on an occurrence and click Suppress on the shortcut menu to suppress the selected occurrence. Finally you will see an Occurrence item for each occurrence in the pattern. This option is not available on the first occurrence.Termination Method: Identical: This is the default method which provides the best performance for large patterns. you immediately see the difference. Orientation Method: These options control the orientation of the patterned features. each occurrence uses an identical termination method regardless of where they intersect other features. Using this method. This method requires more processing and can increase computational time on large patterns. the way they appear in the browser is unique compared to other features.

Optionally include information for Direction 2 and click OK. Adjust the number of occurrence. Inc. create a 2D sketch containing the path for the pattern. On the Panel Bar. 2.Process Overview The following steps can be used to create a rectangular pattern. 4. part edge. Create a part with a feature(s) to be patterned. On the Panel Bar. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 259 . Enter the number of occurrences and distance values and adjust the Spacing method accordingly. Click the Path button under Direction 1 and select the path for the pattern. To create a pattern along a path. Click the Path button under Direction 1 and select a path. click the Rectangular Pattern tool and select the feature(s) to be patterned. Optionally provide information for Direction 2. 1. distance. or origin axis for the pattern. click the Rectangular Pattern tool and select the feature to be patterned. and spacing options as required and click OK.Creating Rectangular Patterns . 3.

There are also options for controlling the creation method and positioning method. Procedure When you start the Circular Pattern tool. You then select a rotation axis which serves as the center of the pattern. so any changes in the original feature are reflected in the pattern occurrences. Next you set the pattern properties such as number of occurrences and angle.The Circular Pattern Tool You use the Circular Pattern tool to duplicate one or more features in a circular pattern. When you create these patterns. you must first select a feature to pattern. Example of a Circular Pattern Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Circular Pattern tool. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut SHIFT+O 260 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . they are associative to the original feature.

Circular Pattern Dialog Box . Creation Method: Identical: This the default method which provides the best performance for large patterns. : Flips the rotational direction of the pattern. Using this method. This method requires more processing and can increase computational time on large patterns. Rotation Axis: Select the rotation axis for the pattern. each occurrence uses an identical termination method regardless of where they intersect other features. Adjust to Model: This method enables each occurrence termination to be calculated. work axes. Valid selections include circular faces. Fitted: Sets the angle value to represent the total rotational angle of the pattern. : Specify the angle for the pattern. The result of this angle is based on the Positioning Method chosen. This number includes the original feature. Placement: : Specify the number of occurrences for the pattern. All Rights Reserved 261 . Positioning Method: Incremental: Sets the angle value to represent the angle between occurrences. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Expanded The Circular Pattern dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Features: Select the feature(s) to be patterned. or part edges.

This option is not available on the first occurrence. If you expand a rectangular or circular pattern. Finally you will see an Occurrence item for each occurrence in the pattern. you immediately see the difference.Browser Appearance of Rectangular/Circular Patterns When you create patterns. Right-click on an occurrence and click Suppress on the shortcut menu to suppress the selected occurrence. The first Occurrence represents the initial feature used in the pattern followed by the number of occurrences created. Located under the pattern feature. along with a folder containing the features used in the pattern. you will find any sketches used as a path. the way they appear in the browser is unique compared to other features. 262 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features .

All Rights Reserved 263 . 3. 1. Create a part containing the feature(s) to be patterned.Creating Circular Patterns .Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating circular patterns. Optionally click the [>>] button to expand the dialog box and adjust the options as required. On the Panel Bar. Click OK to create the pattern. Inc. Then click the Rotation Axis icon and select the feature representing the rotation axis for the pattern. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 2. click the Circular Pattern tool and select the feature(s) to be patterned.

click Exercise: Pattern Features 2. click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features. You then edit the patterned features to suppress occurrences within each. Completed Face Plate with Patterned Features 264 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . you open a face plate component and create both rectangular and patterned features.Exercise: Pattern Features In this exercise. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. From the Main table of contents page.

Face Drafts Overview Overview Overview When you create designs for casting or molds. Indexer Component with Face Drafts Objectives After completing this lesson. Depending on the design and manufacturing intent. All Rights Reserved 265 . you need to apply draft angles to the faces to allow for the part to be pulled from the mold. you will be able to • Use the Face Draft tool to create and edit face drafts Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. In this lesson you learn how to apply draft angles to faces using the Face Draft tool. you might apply the draft angle to all faces. This draft angle is referred to as a face draft. or to single selected faces. Inc.

the draft angles in this lesson may be exaggerated. When you create a face draft feature. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut SHIFT+D 266 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . Before and After Face Draft Feature Face Draft Angles In reality. you must specify the Pull Direction. After you define the Pull Direction. or origin plane or axis. In this lesson you learn how to create face drafts using each of these methods. you can also choose between a Fixed Edge face draft or Fixed Plane face draft. edge. The result of the draft angle depends on the orientation of the face in relation to the Pull Direction. A draft angle applied to faces on the part allows the part to be pulled away from the mold.The Face Draft Tool You use the Face Draft tool to apply draft angles to selected faces on the part. Note Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Face Draft tool. Procedure When you create the face draft feature. which can be based on a face. you select the faces to apply the draft angle. For visual clarity. draft angles are generally very small.

Inc. you can use the Flip Direction button to flip the Pull Direction. The Pull Direction is normal to the selected plane. After you make the selection. Draft Angle: Specify an angle value for the face draft. If using the Fixed Edge method. Note: If you select an incorrect edge. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Fixed Plane Method: This method creates a face draft calculated from the location of the selected plane. edge. use the CTRL or SHIFT key and reselect the edge to remove it from the selection set. or axis to define the direction the part is pulled away from the mold. Faces: Select the faces to apply the face draft feature. be certain to select the edge you want to remain fixed. plane.The Face Draft dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Fixed Edge Method: This method creates a face draft on the selected face(s) and the selected edge remains fixed in place. All Rights Reserved 267 . Depending on the position of the selected plane this method causes material to be added on one side of the plane and subtracted from the opposite side of the plane. Pull Direction: Select a face.

select the Fixed Edge or Fixed Plane method and then select a face. or axis to define the Pull Direction. edge. In the Face Draft dialog box. In the Draft Angle box. click the Face Draft tool. 1. The face drafts are applied to the selected faces. Select the faces to apply the face draft. plane.Creating Face Drafts . On the Panel Bar.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating face drafts. 3. 268 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . 2. Click OK to create the face draft. select the face at a point closest to the fixed edge. If you are using the Fixed Edge method. enter an angle value. Create a new part containing the features requiring face drafts.

You will experiment with both the Fixed Edge method and Fixed Plane method for creating the face draft. Indexer Component with Face Drafts Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. you create and edit face drafts on the part. click Exercise: Face Drafts 2. From the Main table of contents page. Inc. click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features. All Rights Reserved 269 .Exercise: Face Drafts In this exercise.

You can assign different colors to parts and even create new custom color styles.Creating and Using Color Styles Overview Overview Overview As you create new parts using Autodesk Inventor. Assigning a New Color Style Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to • Change and assign color styles to parts 270 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . a default color style is assigned. In this lesson you learn how to create and assign color styles to parts.

Other color styles are available and can be accessed from the Style drop-down list on the Standard toolbar. it is available only in the part or assembly in which it was created. Color Tab: Located on this tab. The list will update to reflect the closest match. You can copy these custom color styles to templates or other part files by using the Organizer tool.Standard Toolbar Format > Colors Color Dialog Box Style Name: Enter a color style name. Inc. Pull-Down Menu To Assign Colors . Procedure Color styles are stored within each part or assembly file. Save: Click to save the changes to the selected color style. Select the color swatch next to each properties and select a color from the Custom Color dialog box. All Rights Reserved 271 . and Ambient.Creating and Using Color Styles When you create new parts. Emissive. When selecting a material from the list. Appearance: Use the sliders to adjust the Shiny and Opaque color properties. Specular. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. which is located on the Format pull-down menu. the color style name will appear here. If you create a new color style. is four color properties. Use the following methods to create and apply color styles. Diffuse. they are assigned the Default color style.

Close: Click to close the dialog box.Texture Tab Choose: Click to display the Texture Chooser dialog box.Delete: Click to delete the selected color style. Rotation: Adjust the slider to rotate the texture map. Project Library: Select this option to display textures stored within the current project. New: Click to create a new color style. %Scale: Adjust the slider to scale the texture map. Texture Chooser Dialog Box Select a texture by dragging the slider in the preview window. Texture Library: • • Application Library: Select this option to display textures from the Application library. Remove: Click to remove the selected texture from the color style. Colors Dialog Box . Apply: Click to apply the changes to the color style. 272 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . and leave the dialog box open.

click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. All Rights Reserved 273 . you will create a new color style and apply it to your part. click Exercise: Creating and Using Color Styles 2.Exercise: Creating and Using Color Styles In this exercise. Inc. Assigning a New Color Style Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. From the Main table of contents page. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. From the Main table of contents page. Plastic Handle 274 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features .Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed Features Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed Features Print Exercise Reference In this exercise you will utilize the procedures and concepts learned in this lesson to create a plastic handle. click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed Features 2. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. The handle is a two piece design for which you are creating one half of the handle. click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features.

Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • How to create and edit fillet features on a part file. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. How to create a custom color style that includes a texture map. Three methods available for creating chamfers and how to use each method. Why face drafts are typically used and how these manufacturing methods correlate to options in the dialog box such as Pull-Direction. How to use the options in the Shell dialog box and how they effect the shell feature. The different options available in the Holes dialog box and how to use these options to create different types of holes. How to use the Face Draft tool to apply draft angles to selected faces on a part model. All Rights Reserved 275 . Inc. How to adjust options in the Colors dialog box to effect the appearance properties of a new color style. How to use the options on each tab of the Fillet dialog box to control how a fillet feature is created. How to edit a pattern and suppress feature occurrences in the pattern if required. How to create and edit rectangular and circular patterns on a part model. How to create and edit Hole and Thread features on a part model. How to remove material from your part by using the Shell tool. How to create and use custom color styles on a part model. The options available for each type of pattern and the effect of these options on the pattern features. How to add thread features to a model.

276 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features .

Assembly Modeling Fundamentals Overview Overview Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about. The Assembly Browser. Assembly based work features Using geometry projected from other parts in the assembly to help create new parts.. The Place Component tool. Controlling the appearance of parts and features in the browser and using Design Views to save assembly views.. • Apply Bottom Up. In this chapter After completing this chapter. resequence and reorder the assembly and use browser filters Create Design Views to save assembly views with specific display related characteristics Place components in an assembly using the Place Component tool Drag components into an assembly Replace existing components in an assembly Create new components in the context of the assembly Place assembly constraints Create basic adaptive features for parts used in an assembly • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • • • The assembly modeling environment and interface used to create assembly models. Top Down. Analyzing components of an assembly. and Middle Out assembly techniques Use the browser to control different aspects of the assembly environment Activate components inplace within the assembly. Degrees of freedom Simulating motion in an assembly Placing assembly constraints. you will be able to. Adaptivity and how it can be used in the assembly.. Locating components in and out of the assembly by using different versions of the Find tool. Dragging components into the assembly and replacing components in the assembly.. Creating components in the context of the assembly.

Introduction to Assembly Modeling Overview Using Assembly modeling you bring individual components into a common environment and use various tools to assemble them. You create new geometry. and manage the relationships between the parts in the assembly. you will be able to • • • Understand the concept of assembly modeling and the procedures you use to create an assembly model Navigate the assembly environment and identify the assembly coordinate system Use the Assembly Panel Bar 278 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Completed Assembly Objectives After completing this lesson. place existing parts and/or assemblies. you will learn the concept of assembly modeling and the tools you use to create an assembly. In this lesson.

to advanced relationships such as adaptivity. Parametric relationships are created between each component that determine component behavior in the assembly. All Rights Reserved 279 . Inc.Assembly Modeling Concepts You create an assembly by combining multiple components and/or assemblies into a single environment. Typical Assembly Model Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. which enables a component to change size based upon its relationship to other components in the assembly. Concept These relationships can range from simple constraint based relationships that determine a components position in the assembly.

you are applying the required assembly constraints.Assembly Modeling Methods Before you create assembly models you must understand the three basic methods you use to create them and how to choose the correct assembly modeling approach. The image below represents a Top-Down approach to assembly modeling. • Top Down Assembly Modeling: All assembly components are designed in the context of the assembly. then while working in the context of the assembly. The initial part is created. You create a blank assembly. additional parts are created. You create and edit all geometry while working in the overall assembly. and are making changes to parts based upon their relationships to other components in the assembly. then design each component while still in the assembly environment. As you design each component. 280 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .

Each part is designed separate from the assembly and other components. After you create the parts they are placed into the assembly and constrained to other parts. If changes to the parts are required. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The image below represents a typical Bottom-Up approach to assembly modeling. All Rights Reserved 281 . they are made outside of the assembly and will automatically be reflected in the assembly model. Inc. After the components are designed. they are placed into the assembly. Each part file is designed separate from the assembly and other parts.• Bottom Up Assembly Modeling: Individual components for an assembly are designed outside of the assembly where they will be placed.

and understand the benefits to each modeling approach. 282 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . You can use all of the methods above and switch between them at anytime. Some components are being placed in the assembly. So even if you design all of the non-standard components using a Top-Down approach. while others are being designed in the context of the assembly. You can begin the assembly using one method and change to a different one. bolts. or other standard hardware. For example. As you become more proficient with the application. and other standard off-the-shelf components such as nuts. you will be able to choose the best approach for a given task. a typical assembly would generally consist of components that are designed specifically for the assembly. you have essentially switched to Middle Out approach because you have included parts in the assembly that were created outside of the assembly. The image below represents a Middle Out approach to assembly modeling. as soon as you insert the standard off-the-shelf components.• Middle Out Assembly Modeling: This flexible approach closely represents the actual real-world design process.

Applied by selecting a circular edge on each part. edges. or axis. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. each with unique solutions and options. Generally applied to bolts. One of the selected faces must be circular. This constraint effectively combines a mate axis/axis and a mate face/face constraint.Assembly Constraints You use Assembly constraints to create parametric relationships between parts in the assembly. Each of these constraint types will be described in greater detail later in this chapter. Tangent Constraint: Used to define a tangential relationship between two parts. There are four basic assembly constraints. you use 3D constraints in an assembly to position parts in relation to other parts. Mate/Flush Constraint: Used to align part features such as faces. Generally applied to circular faces and planar faces. Insert Constraint: Used to insert one component into another. Inc. Just as you use 2D constraints to control 2D geometry. or any part that needs to be inserted into a hole on another part. Applied to faces. All Rights Reserved 283 . edges. or axes. Angle Constraint: Used to specify an angle between two parts. or pins.

You can use these features in situations where assemblies share common parts but with features that are unique to the assembly. Components within the subassembly are constrained to each other. extrusions. thus leaving the parts that are common to all assemblies. For example.Subassemblies You use Subassemblies to organize large assemblies into smaller groups. Assembly Sketching You use Assembly sketching to create assembly based features such as holes. the subassembly behaves as a single part. You must edit constraints within the assembly where they were created. A subassembly is essentially an assembly placed into another assembly. and chamfers on parts in the assembly. In the context of the overall assembly. Assembly based sketches serve as the basis for assembly features. while the subassembly is constrained to the overall assembly as a single component. you create an assembly which was designed to accommodate several different electric motors. The use of assembly features would enable you to create these motor-specific features at the assembly level. unaffected by the feature. To do so you activate the subassembly by double-clicking on the subassembly in the browser. Each motor type requires a different hole pattern and other cutouts for routing the wiring harness. The features however are not stored within the parts that are affected but are local to the current assembly and only effect the parts in the context of the current assembly. 284 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .

When a part is activated for editing. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Assembly Coordinate System Each assembly file contains an independent coordinate system. Note: This only applies if the first part in the assembly is placed into. and center point.0 point in the assembly and can be used as you build the assembly. Assembly Browser: Lists all parts and their constraints. Assembly Coordinate Elements: Identical to the part environment. the browser functions are identical to the part modeling environment. All Rights Reserved 285 . 3D Indicator: Displays the current view orientation relative to the assembly coordinate system.Assembly Environment The assembly environment in Autodesk Inventor software is virtually the same as the part modeling environment with the exception of tools that are unique to assembly modeling. each assembly also contains an independent coordinate system. axes. Principle Assembly Modeling Environment Assembly Panel Bar: Contains tools specific to assembly modeling. Assembly Components: Each component in the assembly is listed.0. and not created from scratch in the context of the assembly. Expand the Origin folder to expose the origin planes. the origin point of the part file will be matched to the origin point of the assembly file. Default coordinate system elements are aligned with the 0. Expand the components to expose the assembly constraints that have been applied. When you place the first part into the assembly.

As you create your assembly model. Procedure Note the keyboard shortcuts next to each icon. the Panel Bar will automatically switch between Assembly. then select Expert. and Sketch modes depending on the context you are using. By setting the Panel Bar to expert mode. 286 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Assembly Panel Bar After you become familiar with the assembly tool icons. At the top of the panel bar. you can switch the panel bar to expert mode. Part. select the Assembly Panel drop-down. Enter these key sequences to start the related tool.Assembly Panel Bar Similar to the Part Modeling Panel Bar. the Assembly Panel Bar contains the tools specific to assembly modeling. you will make more room available for the Assembly/Part browser.

Some techniques performed during this lesson will be covered in greater detail later in this chapter. Completed Assembly Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. you will create a basic assembly model using some of the concepts mentioned in this lesson. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. From the Main table of contents page.Exercise: Introduction to Assembly Modeling In this exercise. All Rights Reserved 287 . click Exercise: Introduction to Assembly Modeling 2. Inc. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

you will be able to • • • • • • • Activate and edit parts in the context of the assembly Control the visibility of parts in an assembly Resequence and Restructure an assembly Create browser filters and utilize them in an assembly Enable and disable components in an assembly Identify grounded components in an assembly and how they effect other assembly components Create and use Design Views 288 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . 5-Axis Robot Assembly Objectives After completing this lesson. In this lesson you will learn about the various options available through the Assembly Browser.Assembly Browser Overview Overview Overview The Assembly Browser offers several options for working in the assembly environment and is your primary tool for interacting with the assembly components and features.

right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu click Edit.Shortcut Menu Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. In-Place Activation . Procedure • • • In the Browser or graphics window. right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu click Open. you must activate the part. In the Browser or graphics window. Any changes to the part are automatically reflected in the assembly. There are a few options available for activating a part in-place. Inc. In order to edit a part in the context of the assembly. All Rights Reserved 289 . In the Browser or graphics window.In-Place Activation In-Place Activation means you activate a part in the context of the assembly. double-click on the part. This option will open the part in a separate window.

The Panel Bar switches to display the modeling tools. the background behind all other parts is greyed.Result of In-Place Activation When a part is activated in the context of the assembly. In the Browser. In the graphics window. Assembly Browser . the part is automatically expanded to expose the part features. the assembly environment changes. • • • • In the Browser. the non-active parts are dimmed.Active Part and Active Part in the Context of the Assembly 290 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .

Procedure Browser Appearance In the Assembly browser.Visibility Control It is possible to control the visibility of all elements in the assembly. Check mark indicates the part is currently visible. While you work in the context of the assembly. in the Assembly Browser or graphics window. parts with the visibility property turned off appear grey. right-click on an element in the assembly and select Visibility on the shortcut menu. Inc. Browser Part Visibility Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 291 .

Assembly Resequencing Assembly Restructure As you create your assembly. Resequencing the assembly enables you to place the parts in a more logical order.Assembly Resequence It is possible to resequence the order of parts in the assembly. click and drag on the part and release the mouse at its new position. Procedure To resequence the assembly. Procedure Access Methods The following methods are available for restructuring your assembly. By restructuring the assembly you are creating subassemblies and placing existing parts into the subassembly. at some point you may need to organize the assembly by placing components into subassemblies. Shortcut Menu In the browser or graphics window. select one or more parts then right-click on a part and select Demote Keyboard Shortcut Select one or more parts and press TAB 292 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . in the browser. Parts are displayed in the browser in the order in which they are placed or created.

New File Location: Enter or browse the location for the new subassembly. you should restructure all parts to be included in the subassembly. All Rights Reserved 293 . To restructure all parts in one step. select all the parts in the browser or graphics window and then select the Demote tool. the Create In-Place Component dialog box appears. at the same time. Assembly Restructure Constraint Warning Assembly Restructure Constraint Warning Dialog Box When restructuring parts into subassemblies. This will place all selected parts into the new subassembly and maintain the constraints. Template: Select a template to use for the new subassembly. Constraints applied to parts residing in the same assembly will be maintained if they are restructured into a new subassembly at the same time.When you restructure an assembly using the Demote tool. When possible. there is a potential that you will loose some assembly constraints during the restructuring process. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Constraints applied to parts residing in different assemblies and subassemblies will not be maintained. Inc. Create In-Place Dialog Box New File Name: Enter a file name for the subassembly. If you restructure the parts separately you will loose the assembly constraints and will need to recreate them.

Drag and Drop Restructuring If a subassembly already exists. it is possible to restructure the assembly by dragging parts from the top level assembly to the subassembly. you may loose assembly constraints using this method. It is also possible to drag and drop parts from the subassembly to the top level assembly. Depending on the constraint conditions. Drag and Drop Restructuring 294 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .

Show Children Only: Displays only first level children. At the top of the Assembly Browser. Hide Notes: Hides all notes attached to features. As your assembly grows in complexity. All Rights Reserved 295 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Browser Filters You can filter the display of information in the browser by using the browser filters. Hides parts contained within a subassembly when the top-level assembly is active. Hide Warnings: Hides warning symbols attached to constraints in the browser. Hide Documents: Hides inserted documents. the browser filters can assist you by streamlining its information. Inc. Procedure Hide Work Features: Hides all work features including the Origin folders. click the Filter button and the filter menu is displayed.

The Modeling View will display the parts and their features. Expand this folder to expose the assembly constraints. This mode enables you to identify part features and activate them for editing without having to activate the part. note also the Constraints folder at the top. note the appearance of the assembly constraints while in the Position View and the part features while in Modeling View.Browser Display Mode When you work in an assembly the Assembly browser display mode defaults to Position View. Procedure Assembly Browser Display Modes When you examine the images above. While in the Modeling View. You can change the display mode to Modeling View by selecting the Position Mode drop-down menu at the top of the browser. It displays the parts and assembly constraints. 296 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click Enabled. When a component is not enabled. When a component is enabled you have access to the component for editing and applying constraints. Concept When you open an assembly. For large assemblies this is beneficial to increasing overall system performance. A check mark indicates the part is currently enabled. Inc. the data structure of enabled components is available while components that are not enabled. it appears dimmed in the graphics window and its icon color in the browser changes to green. they are enabled. when you place components into an assembly. All Rights Reserved 297 . only the graphics information is loaded.Enabled Components By default. Assembly with Component Not Enabled In the browser or graphics window. right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu.

while others will move relative to the parts to which they have been constrained. Concept Although the first part is grounded.Grounded Components By default. the first part in each assembly is grounded. Grounded Components in Browser 298 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu. All degrees of freedom are removed from the component and it cannot be moved. When you apply constraints to a grounded component. there is no limit to the number of grounded parts that you can have in an assembly. When you ground parts you can use them to mimic real-world situation where some parts are fixed in position. You can also remove the grounded property from the first part in the assembly. Grounded components appear in the browser with the Push Pin icon. In the browser or graphics window. click Grounded. the non-grounded component will move to validate the constraint while the grounded component remains fixed in its position.

all visible: Built-in design view that when activated will turn the visibility of all components on. For example. Procedure Several different properties are stored within the design view.nothing visible: Built-in design view that when activated will turn the visibility of all components off.Design Views When you create a new assembly file. You can also use Design views as the basis for Drawing and Presentation views. Browser Menu Area Pull Down Menu View > Design Views Each Design View file can contain multiple design views. system. as you work on an assembly. If you save the display configuration as a new design view. a separate Design View file is automatically created.default: This design view is automatically created and is based Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. UserName. Design Views are used to store assembly display configurations that you can recall the next time you work on the assembly. Design Views are stored in the same directory as the assembly and by default have the same name as the assembly with an *. • • • • • • Component visibility (visible or not visible) Sketch and work feature visibility Component enabled status Color and style properties applied in the assembly Zoom and viewing angle Browser display mode (Position or Modeling) Access Methods The following methods are available for accessing Design Views.idv extension The following properties are stored within design view. By default there will be three design views created. you may need to turn the visibility off of several components to work on parts internally. you can recall that configuration by activating the design view. • • • system. Inc. All Rights Reserved 299 .

Delete: Click to delete the selected design view. Apply: Click to activate the selected design view. Enter a new design view name. Design Views Dialog Box Storage Location: Represents the current storage location for the design view file. 300 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Browse: Click to browse for a design view file. Save: Click to save the current display configuration as a design view. Design View: Lists the name of the currently selected design view.upon your system user name. New: Click to create a new design view file.

Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Exercise: Assembly Browser 2. Inc.Exercise: Assembly Browser In this exercise. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. All Rights Reserved 301 . 5-Axis Robot Assembly Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. From the Main table of contents page. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. you will open an assembly file and use the Assembly Browser to perform several tasks.

Placing Components in an Assembly Overview Overview Overview As you create assemblies you place component geometry that represents the assembly's individual parts. In this lesson you will learn about several different ways you can place components into an assembly. you will be able to • • • • Use the Place Component tool to place parts into an assembly Utilize sources other than Autodesk Inventor software to place components Drag components into an assembly Replace components in an assembly 302 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Completed Robot Assembly Objectives After completing this lesson.

select the file type in the Files of type drop-down list. Select this tool and the Open dialog box will be displayed. Inc. The same options for opening files are available. however the end result is the selected file will be placed into the assembly file instead of opened for editing.The Place Component Tool You use the Place Component tool to place components into the assembly. You can place additional occurrences of the part by clicking different locations in the graphics window. To place files other than Autodesk Inventor software files. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Keyboard Shortcut P Open Dialog Box Select the file to place into the assembly and click Open. right-click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Place Component tool. All Rights Reserved 303 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. After you place the part into the assembly.0. Procedure The first component you place into the assembly will be automatically placed at the assembly's origin point (0.0) and will be grounded.

click the Place Component tool.Placing Components . 1. Optionally place additional components by clicking other locations in the graphics window. 2. or press ESC to cancel. Open or create a new assembly file. 304 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . In the Open dialog box. select the file you want to place into the assembly. 5. 3. The first component in the assembly is positioned automatically and is grounded. On the Panel Bar. click the Place Component tool and continue to place components into the assembly. On the Panel Bar.Process Overview The following steps are an overview for using the Place Component tool to place components into the assembly. and click Open. 4.

Concept • • • • • • • Autodesk Inventor parts and assemblies. Supported File Types In the Open dialog box.Sources of Placed Components As you use Autodesk Inventor software to build assemblies you can use geometry from other applications as parts in your assembly.igs.ige.ipt. (*.iam) Autodesk Mechanical Desktop (*. Supported Formats Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.iges) STEP files (*. would be reflected in the assembly. All Rights Reserved 305 . Some formats will be converted to Autodesk Inventor files when placed into an assembly. Any changes in the Autodesk Mechanical Desktop file. select the Files of type drop-down list to display the supported file types. The following list represents the supported formats that you can place into an assembly. Inc. *.asm) Different capabilities are available with each of these formats. *. *. *. but others such as Autodesk Mechanical Desktop will be linked to the assembly.sat) (ACIS/ShapeManager) IGES files (*. *.prt. *.stp.dwg) AutoCAD (*.step) Pro Engineer (*.dwg) SAT files (*.ste.

Mechanical Desktop Parts in an Autodesk Inventor Assembly The image above represents an Autodesk Mechanical Desktop part used in an Autodesk Inventor assembly. Changes to the part would be reflected in the assembly. 306 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Right-click on the part and then select Open to open the part in Autodesk Mechanical Desktop.

Dragging an Open Part File into an Assembly In the image below. Dragging Components from Windows Explorer Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. Procedure In the image below. the active part file. This results in the component being placed into the assembly just as if you had used the Place Component tool.ipt is being dragged into the nonactive but open assembly. robo_hand.Dragging Components into an Assembly You can drag components into an assembly from other open part files or from Windows Explorer. All Rights Reserved 307 . a component is being dragged into the assembly from a Windows Explorer window.

As a result Autodesk Inventor may not be able to locate the file the next time the assembly is opened. you must edit the Project paths before re-opening the assembly to include component location or move the component to a location identified within the current project. the following message will appear. The message means that the current location is not referenced in the Project file. make certain the location of the component is referenced in the current Project file. If you place the component in the assembly. 308 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . If not. Click OK to place the component in the assembly.When you drag components from a Windows Explorer window.

Replaces all occurrences of the selected component. There are two versions of the Replace component tool: . some assembly constraints will be lost and need to be recreated. .Replaces only the selected component. Inc. When the component is replaced. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut CTRL+H > Replace SHIFT+H > Replace All Possible Constraint Loss Dialog Box When you replace components in an assembly the Possible Constraint Loss dialog box will appear. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. or click Cancel to cancel the operation. the new version is placed in the same location as the existing version. All Rights Reserved 309 . but the result depends largely on the differences in geometry between the existing component and the replacement component. For example when you start the assembly. you may need to replace components. you may not have access to all the required parts. Procedure When you replace components in an assembly. The origin of the new component is coincident with the origin of the component being replaced. you can use the Replace tool to replace the proxy part with the final version.Replacing Components As you build assemblies. Access Methods The following methods are available for access the Replace component tool. Autodesk Inventor software will attempt to retain the constraints. After you receive the required geometry. Click OK to continue and replace the selected component. In the meantime you place a proxy part in place of the final part.

double-click on the replacement component. 1.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for replacing components. click OK to replace the component. click the Replace component tool and in the Open dialog box. On the Panel Bar. 2. In the browser or graphics window.Replacing Components . 310 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . If the Possible Constraint Loss dialog box appears. select the component to be replaced.

6. In the Open dialog box. click the Replace All tool. 4. double-click on the replacement component. Click OK in the Possible Constraint Loss dialog box. select one of the occurrences and on the Panel Bar. 5. All occurrences of the selected component are replaced. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 311 . To replace multiple occurrences of the same part.3.

Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. From the Main table of contents page. click Exercise: Placing Components in an Assembly 2. Completed Robot Assembly 312 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . you will use the Replace Component tool to replace components in the assembly. After you place the components. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals.Exercise: Placing Components in an Assembly In this exercise. you use the techniques covered in this lesson to place components into a new assembly.

This technique enables you to take advantage of other part features in the assembly to create new geometry and validate this new geometry based upon the design intent. In this lesson you will learn how to create components in the context of an assembly. Inc. All Rights Reserved 313 .Creating Components in an Assembly Overview Overview Overview Creating components in an assembly enables you to design parts in the context of the assembly in which they will reside. you will be able to • • • • Create parts in the context of the assembly Use work features in assemblies Use 2D sketches in an assembly Use projected edges and features Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Components Created In-Place Objectives After completing this lesson.

Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut N 314 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . this approach enables you to design new parts in the assembly environment in which they will reside. Ability to validate function within the assembly. Presents a better picture of the overall design intent. Example of Creating a Part in Place Access Methods The following methods are available for accessing the Create Component tool. • • • • Ability to reference other parts in the assembly.Creating Parts in Place Creating parts in the context of the assembly enables you to take advantage of other geometry in the assembly by referencing the features of other parts to assist in the creation of new parts. Ability to create adaptive relationships between parts. Commonly referred to as Top-Down assembly modeling. Procedure Benefits to Creating Parts in Place The following list represents some of the benefits of creating parts in the context of the assembly.

2. Browse: Click to browse for a template file.Create In-Place Component Dialog Box New FIle Name: Enter a name for the new file. Inc. On the Panel Bar. • • Part: Select to create a new part file. Creating Parts and Subassemblies in Place . click the Create Component tool and enter the required values in the Create In-Place Component dialog box. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Open an existing. assembly. Click OK to create the new part. Assembly: Select to create subassembly. New File Location: Enter the location for the new part or assembly file. File Type: Select the file type in the drop-down list. 1. Constrain sketch plane to selected face or plane: Selecting this option will place a flush constraint between the new part and the selected face. or create a new. All Rights Reserved 315 . Template: Select a template to use for the new part or assembly file.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating parts and subassemblies in place.

Use part modeling tools to create the 3D geometry.3. Use the sketching tools available to create new sketch geometry or project geometry from other parts in the assembly. Select a face or plane to define the initial sketch plane on the new part. 6. 5. To create a subassembly in-place: 316 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . 4.

Select a face or plane to orient the new subassembly's origin. Inc. click the Create Component tool and enter the required values in the Create In-Place Component dialog box. 9.7. Click OK to create the new subassembly. You can now create new parts in the context of the subassembly or place components that have already been created. On the Panel Bar. All Rights Reserved 317 . The subassembly is automatically activated. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 8.

remember that the assembly file contains it own coordinate system and origin work features. Concept You will also find the Work Plane. and Work Point tools to create new assembly based work features. Assembly Work Feature Being Used 318 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . You can use them to orient sketch planes on new parts and they can serve as the basis for additional work features in new parts.Using Work Features in Assemblies As you create components in the context of the assembly. Work Axis.

1. Procedure Using this technique enables you to validate the part's intended function before spending the time required to develop the parts final form. All Rights Reserved 319 . You can create the fundamental sketch geometry you need to validate certain features and then exit the part and assign assembly constraints to the 2D parts in the same way you apply constraints to 3D features. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using 2D Sketches in an assembly. Inc. it is not necessary to create 3D features in the initial design phases. Create a new part in the context of the assembly and use the sketching tools to create only the geometry required to validate function.Using 2D Sketches You can use 2D sketches in the assembly while you create new parts and validate design intent. As you do. Constraint Dragging 2D Parts in an Assembly Using 2D Sketches in the Assembly .

320 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Exit the part and return to the assembly environment. If required. 5. 3.2. The 2D parts will react in the assembly the same way as a fully developed 3D part. create additional parts containing 2D geometry and constrain as required. Apply assembly constraints between the new 2D part and the existing parts. Validate the components by constraint dragging the 2D parts and/or editing dimensions and/or other constraints. 4.

Geometry cannot be trimmed or dimensioned Static Reference Receiving part is not adaptive Degrees of freedom on receiving part are not effected. Projecting Edges and Features The follow methods are available for accessing the tools to project edges and features. All Rights Reserved 321 .Using Projected Edges and Features Using the same tools to project edges and features in a single part file. the resulting geometry will either be associative reference geometry or static reference geometry. Each type offers unique benefits and drawbacks. some of which are beyond the scope of this course. The biggest difference between associative or static reference geometry is what happens to the projected geometry if the originating feature changes. refer to the Autodesk Inventor Help system. you can create parts within the assembly with matching or uniform features. you can project edges and features from other parts in the assembly. Static reference geometry is not linked back to the originating part and will not change if the source features change. The following table represents some key differences between Associative Reference geometry and Static Reference geometry. Geometry cannot be trimmed or dimensioned For more information on the use of projected geometry. Using this technique. Panel Bar Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Associative reference geometry maintains a link to the original part and changes if the feature from which it was projected changes. Inc. Associative Reference Receiving part is adaptive Degrees of freedom on receiving part are reduced. You can also use this projected geometry to create features on the current part. Procedure When you project 2D geometry across parts in the assembly.

Adaptivity will be introduced later in this chapter. In the Options dialog box. Projected Associative Reference Geometry 322 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . it also adds a certain level of complexity to managing the geometry. the projected geometry is associative. on the Tools menu click Application Options.Assembly Tab (Partial) Cross Part Geometry Projection: Selecting this option will create associative reference geometry. feature and part. Although this adds a degree of flexibility in regards to the design process. Options Dialog Box . click the Assembly tab and adjust the option accordingly. In the image below. Clearing this option will create static reference geometry. Note the appearance in the browser and the adaptive icon associated with the adaptive sketch. If this option is chosen Autodesk Inventor will assign an Adaptive status to the current part and active sketch.To enable or disable the associative reference geometry.

projected geometry is static. static reference geometry is magenta. All Rights Reserved 323 .In the image below. while associative reference geometry is black. Projected Static Reference Geometry Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. When projecting cross-part geometry. Note the appearance of the sketch in the browser. Inc. There is no adaptive icon or linked reference to the sketch.

You will use the 2D sketch geometry to validate assembly function before creating the 3D features. Components Created In-Place 324 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. You will create additional parts in place and project geometry from other parts in the assembly. click Exercise: Creating Components in an Assembly 2. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.Exercise: Creating Components in an Assembly In this exercise. From the Main table of contents page. you will open an assembly and create new components using the techniques learned in this lesson.

and how they are affected by constraints Perform an unconstrained drag Perform a constrained drag Drive assembly constraints Move and rotate components in an assembly Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you will be able to • • • • • Identify the remaining degrees of freedom on a part. All Rights Reserved 325 . Inc. Robot Assembly Before Driving Constraints Objectives After completing this lesson. The method you choose will largely depend upon the constraint condition of the components and/or the task you need to accomplish.Moving Components Overview Overview Overview There are several methods available for moving components in an assembly. In this lesson you will learn how to move components in an assembly.

Degrees of Freedom Symbol The image above represents the DOF symbol that can be viewed on each part in the assembly. In the Properties dialog box. Y. In some cases you do not want to fully constrain a component. it is considered to be fully constrained. is Translational freedom. • • To view the DOF symbols on all components in the assembly. For example. if you have an assembly with components that are designed to move along a given axis. You do not have to fully constrain any component in the assembly. click Degrees of Freedom or enter SHIFT+E. They represent how you can move the component along or rotated about each of the X. click Properties. click the Occurrence tab and select the Degrees of Freedom option. while the degrees of freedom that enable a part to rotate about an axis is Rotational freedom. How to View a Components Degrees of Freedom There are two methods available for viewing the DOF symbol on components in the assembly. on the View menu. then you should leave the degrees of freedom to allow that movement. Concept As you apply assembly constraints to components. you reduce the degrees of freedom for the components being constrained. right-click on the component. and Z axes. and on the shortcut menu.Degrees of Freedom Each component in an assembly will initially have six degrees of freedom (DOF). When a part has no degrees of freedom remaining. 326 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . The degrees of freedom that enable a component to move along an axis. To view individual component's DOF symbol.

all degrees of freedom are removed. Part is fully constrained. one remains. Three degrees of freedom are removed. 2. Flush constraint being applied. The unconstrained component has all six degrees of freedom remaining. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The Effect of Constraints on Degrees of Freedom The following steps represent the effect of assembly constraints on degrees of freedom. Inc. All Rights Reserved 327 .Grounded Components Note When components are grounded in an assembly. 1. A grounded component has no degrees of freedom. Mate constraint being applied. No remaining degrees of freedom. 3. 4. it has no degrees of freedom remaining. Because the first part in each assembly is automatically grounded. three remain. Flush constraint being applied. Two degrees of freedom removed.

It is sometimes necessary to move components in order to place assembly constraints. You are able to drag the component in the directions allowed by the remaining degrees of freedom. Procedure Unconstrained Drag Constrained Drag To perform a constrained drag you click and drag on a component that is constrained in the assembly. Procedure 328 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .Unconstrained Drag You can move unconstrained components by dragging them in the graphics window. Other components constrained to the selected component will also move based upon their remaining degrees of freedom.

these values are assigned a Start and End value. Procedure When you create assembly constraints.Constraint Drivers As you build assemblies and add constraints to the parts. Shortcut Menu Right-click on a constraint and select Drive Constraint Drive Constraint Dialog Box Start: Enter a minimum value for the current constraint. Driving constraints makes this visualization possible. this value will be an angle format. All Rights Reserved 329 . For angular constraint. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. When you drive a constraint. this value will represent a distance. Pause Delay: Enter a delay in seconds to be applied between steps. You animate the assembly by driving the constraints through the range specified. each constraint type contains a property representing an offset or angle value. While you drive the constraint. you may need to visualize the assembly in motion to see how the components interact with each other. other assembly constraints are constantly evaluated and the assembly components are only allowed to move through the available degrees of freedom for each component. End: Enter a maximum value for the current constraint. Inc. Access Methods The following methods are available for accessing the Drive Constraints tool. for all other constraints.

Collision Detection: When selected.Player Controls: Use the standard player controls to drive the constraint through its sequence. Repetitions: • • Start/End: Runs the sequence from its Start position to its End position. If a collision is detected. Increment: Select the method for calculating the increment of simulation. Start/End/Start: Runs the sequence from its Start position to its End position and back to its Start position. the motion is stopped at the point of interference. the dialog box will be minimized while recording the sequence. 330 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . will allow adaptive parts to update if necessary based upon changes in the assembly. • • • Amount of value: Uses the value below to increment each step of the sequence. Total # of steps: Uses the value below for the total number of steps for the sequence. Click to record the sequence to a standard AVI format. AVI rate: Specifies frame rate when recording the simulation. Value: Enter a value for the increment method. Drive Adaptivity: When selected. Minimize dialog during recording: When selected. the assembly is analyzed for interference as each component moves through its sequence.

Driving More Than One Constraint Note Although it is beyond the scope of this course. right-click on the constraint and on the shortcut menu. Inc.Driving Constraints . All Rights Reserved 331 . click Drive Constraint. 3. In the Drive constraint dialog box. enter a Start and End value. for more information. through the use of parameters and formulas it is possible to drive more than one constraint at a time. Inc. In the browser. Refer to the Advanced Assembly Modeling course from Autodesk. 1.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for driving assembly constraints. 2. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. adjust other settings as required and click the Play button to drive the constraint. The assembly constraint is driven through its Start and End positions.

Using these tools. the assembly constraints are temporarily ignored. select the appropriate tool then click and drag on the part being moved or rotated.Moving and Rotating Components To move constrained components in an assembly to facilitate adding additional constraints you use either Move Component or Rotate Component tools.Potential Cursors 332 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . When you use these tools on a component in the assembly. After you move or rotate the component click the Update button on the Standard toolbar to reapply the assembly constraints. you can move components in the assembly just as if they were not constrained at all. Procedure To move or rotate a component in the assembly. Access Methods The following methods are available for accessing the Move and Rotate Component tools. enabling you to move or rotate the components independently from the degrees of freedom that may be remaining on the part. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcuts V = Move G = Rotate Rotating Components .

it will not move back to its original location after performing an Update. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Moving or Rotating Grounded Components Note If you move or rotate a grounded component. Click and drag in the appropriate location to rotate the component.When you rotate components. the 3D Rotate symbol appears similar to the 3D Rotate symbol when rotating views. Inc. All Rights Reserved 333 .

Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. you will open an assembly and view the available degrees of freedom on different components. Robot Assembly Before Driving Constraints 334 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .Exercise: Moving Components In this exercise. click Exercise: Moving Components 2. You will then use the techniques learned in this lesson to move the components and drive assembly constraints. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. From the Main table of contents page. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals.

and edit assembly constraints. All Rights Reserved 335 . LCD-Mount Assembly Objectives After completing this lesson. Inc. After you apply the constraints. The relationships created between parts using assembly constraints. view. You apply assembly constraints to the parts to define their position and available degrees of freedom. You use the Constraint tool or the ALT-Drag method to apply constraints without using the Place Constraint dialog box. there are a couple of ways to view the constraints in the browser. realistically mimics real-world situations and operating conditions of the assembly components. and if necessary edit the constraints.Constraining Components Overview Overview Overview When you build assemblies you define parametric relationships between the parts in the assembly. In this lesson you will learn how to apply. you will be able to • • • • Understand how assembly constraints effect individual parts in the assembly Apply and edit basic assembly constraints in the assembly View assembly constraints in the browser Use the ALT-Drag method to apply assembly constraints Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

The geometry that you choose is dependent upon the type of constraint you apply. after you select the type of constraint. The features to which the constraints are applied can be geometric part features. mimic the real world conditions of the parts in the assembly by using assembly constraint solutions that most closely resemble how the parts will be assembled after manufacturing. but parts should not be left unconstrained. or work features (work planes. or with constraint conditions that do not fully represent the intended function of the part in the assembly. angle. you should apply the constraints using the simplest approach possible while using constraint solutions that will constrain the parts as completely as required by the design intent. you will select one feature on each part to apply it. or points) at the assembly or part level. then it should be grounded or constrained to assembly level work features.Placing Constraints You apply each assembly constraint to either two components in the assembly or to one component and one assembly origin feature. As you plan the constraints. When you start the Constraint tool. tangent. If a component in an assembly is not intended to be constrained to other components. You are not required to fully constrain parts in the assembly. Using this approach enables you to develop an assembly of parts that interact as intended with other parts in the assembly. The constraint type chosen will depend upon the part features and the design intent. Example of Assembly Constraint Simple but complete When you apply assembly constraints to parts. 336 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Concept There are four types of assembly constraints that can be applied between parts: mate. an insert. axes.

select the Hidden Edge Display options to display all edges on the parts. Example of Proper Constraint Planning Placing Constraints on Obstructed Geometry Tip When placing constraints on obstructed geometry or features. you could use a variety of different constraint solutions to assemble these two components. All Rights Reserved 337 . Inc.In the image below. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. However after analyzing how the components will be put together. the proper constraint is used to mimic the real world process of assembling the two components. on the Standard toolbar.

On the Panel Bar. click the Constraint tool and select the type of constraint to apply. the overall process of applying constraints is the same. 338 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . 1. Open or create an assembly. Select the features to apply the constraints. and the geometry chosen. Depending on the type of constraint.How to Place Constraints . The following steps represent an overview for applying constraints. you are given a preview of how the constraint will be applied. 3. 2.Process Overview Although each type of constraint will create a different result.

If necessary adjust the solution option and enter an offset or angle value. Additional constraints being applied. Inc. Click apply to create the constraint then continue to add additional constraints as required. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.4. 6. 5. All Rights Reserved 339 .

enabling you to preview the constraint and confirm or change the constraint settings. the selection1 and selection2 buttons are automatically activated. Procedure Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut C Place Constraint Dialog Box Type: Select the type of constraint to create. Solution: Each constraint type offers different solutions. Refer to the section below for available solution options for each. The components will move into position. this option automatically inserts the angle or offset value if the offset field is blank.Basic Constraints There are four basic assembly constraints. Each are designed to create a certain constraint condition between the components in the assembly. If you need to change a selected feature. Offset/Angle: The label for this field will change depending on the type of constraint you select. click the appropriate selection button and reselect the geometry. The offset or angle value is calculated based upon the 340 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Predict Offset and Orientation: Only available for Mate and Angle constraints. Enter a value for the offset or angle of the constraint. You must first select the part. then select the feature for the constraint. Pick Part First: This option limits the feature selections to the selected part. Selections: As you select features. Preview Constraint: This option previews the constraint before applying. This option is usually used in situations where the feature you are attempting to constrain is obstructed by other parts in the assembly.

edges.part's current position and is inserted into the offset/angle field. Inc. Flush: Selected faces will be coplanar. Mate Constraint You use the mate constraint to mate selected geometry. enter the offset/angle value manually. To override this setting. Valid selections include faces.Axis/Axis Mate Constraint/Mate Solution . axes. All Rights Reserved 341 . The following represents examples using the Mate constraint. Solution Options: Mate: Selected geometry will be mated to each other. This is useful in applying constraints without moving the geometry from its current position. and points.Face/Face Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. You can also enter an offset value to offset the geometry. planes. Mate Constraint/Mate Solution .

or lines. Undirected Angle: This is the default solution and it allows either orientation of the angle constraint. Solution Options: Directed Angle: Using this solution option. planes.Point/Point Mate Constraint/Flush Solution .Mate Constraint/Mate Solution . This helps resolve situations in which the component's orientation flips during a constraint drive or drag. the angle is measured by using the right-hand rule.Face/Face Angle Constraint Use the angle constraint to specify an angle between faces.Face/Face 342 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Angle Constraint .

Tangent Constraint/Outside Solution . This requires the selection of two circular edges. Aligned: This solution will align the face normals. The center point of the edge is calculated and the result is a constraint in which the center lines are aligned and the selected edges are made coplanar. Solution Options: Opposed: This solution will force the face normals to be opposed. or between two circular features. Inc.Circular Face: Insert Constraint Use the insert constraint to insert a circular part feature into another circular part feature.Circular Face .Tangent Constraint Use the tangent constraint to define a tangency condition between one circular feature and plane or face. Outside: Creates an outside tangent solution. All Rights Reserved 343 . Solution Options: Inside: Creates an inside tangent solution. Insert Constraint Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

Each constraint is listed twice in the browser.Position View When you create assembly constraints. If you need to edit. you can access the constraint under either part. for example. or delete a constraint. Procedure Constraint Geometry Highlighted Browser . If you select a constraint in the browser it will highlight the geometry referenced by the constraint. each part or origin feature is associated with one-half of the constraint. suppress. when the browser is in the default Position View. Viewing Assembly Constraints in the Browser 344 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .Viewing Constraints After you create the assembly constraints you can view them in the browser different ways. This image displays how the assembly constraint appears under each part that it has been applied.

Browser - Modeling View
If you change the browser view to Modeling View, the constraints appear under the Constraints folder. You can expand the folder to access the constraints. Using this view places all the constraints in one location however, it can be difficult to identify constraints on specific parts in larger assemblies.

Assembly Constraints in Browser - Modeling View

Shortcut Menu Options
In the browser, if you right-click on a constraint the following shortcut menu is displayed. Find in Window: Zooms the current view to geometry containing the selected constraint. This assists you in identifying the constraint graphically. Other Half: This option highlights the other half of the constraint, by expanding the other component to which it has been applied and highlighting the constraint. This option helps identify which components the constraint has been applied to.

Constraint Shortcut Menu Options

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

345

Editing Constraints
You can edit the constraint much the same way you edit placed features. Locate the constraint in the browser, then right-click on the constraint and on the shortcut menu, click Edit.
Procedure

Editing Constraints

When you edit a constraint, all edits are done in the same dialog box used to create the constraint. All options can be changed including the type of constraint.

Editing Constraints

346

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals

Changing the Constraint Offset/Angle Value
There are two methods to change the constraint offset/angle value without using the Edit Constraint dialog box. • Using the Edit Box at the bottom of the browser: Selecting a constraint will cause the Edit Box to appear at the bottom of the browser. Enter a new offset/angle value for the constraint and press ENTER.

Using the Edit Dimension dialog box: In the browser, right-click on the constraint and on the shortcut menu, click Modify. The Edit Dimension dialog box will appear. Enter a new offset/angle value and press ENTER or click the green check mark.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

347

Using ALT -Drag to Place Constraints
The ALT-Drag method is an alternate method for placing assembly constraints. Hold the ALT key down, then click and drag on the feature receiving the constraint. A constraint glyph will appear indicating the type of constraint being applied. Continue to drag the cursor to another part in the assembly and touch another valid feature. Then release the mouse button to create the assembly constraint.
Procedure

ALT-Drag Constraint Glyph

ALT-Drag Constraint Types
When you use the ALT-Drag method to apply constraints, the constraint type is based upon the geometry you select. You can change the constraint type by pressing the appropriate key. Release the ALT key but you must continue to hold down the left mouse button. • Mate: M or 1 • Angle: A or 2 • Tangent: T or 3 • Insert: I or 4

348

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals

ALT-Drag to Place Constraints - Process Overview
The following steps represent an overview for using the ALT-Drag method to apply assembly constraints. 1. While holding the ALT key, select the feature to be constrained and while holding the left mouse button down, drag the part. You can release the ALT key but you must hold the mouse button down.

2.

While holding the mouse button down, drag the part to the next feature to assign the constraint and release the mouse when the part is in place.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

349

Exercise: Constraining Components
In this exercise, you use the concepts and techniques learned in this lesson to constrain components in the assembly. After you apply the constraints you will edit some constraints to see the effect on the assembly.
Print Exercise Reference

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:
1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Constraining Components

2.

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

LCD-Mount Assembly

350

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals

Adaptive Components
Overview Overview

Overview
Adaptivity is intended to give the designer a way to create parts that can adapt to the assembly in which they are being used. Historically, parametric modeling systems required the use of complex cross-part parametric equations in order for one part to change size if another part in the assembly changed. One problem with this technique, is that cross-part parametric equations could become so complex, that even the original designer could have problems managing the relationship and equations used in such an environment. With the introduction of Adaptivity, Autodesk Inventor enables the designer to create adaptive relationships between parts in an assembly, that do not require the use of complex cross-part parameters. Largely based upon assembly constraints, Adaptivity enables a part to change based upon changes in other parts in the assembly to which it has been constrained. Furthermore, with Autodesk Inventor you can mix both Parametric dimensions and adaptivity within the same part and/or assembly. Thus, you can control the design intent by using the most appropriate technique. Although an in depth discussion of Adaptivity is beyond the scope of the course, you will learn the essential aspects of creating adaptive assemblies using Autodesk Inventor.

Completed Assembly with Adaptive Parts

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to • • • Understand adaptive features and how you use them Create adaptive features and sketches Use adaptive occurrences in an assembly and control them with constraints
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

351

Introduction to Adaptive Features
Adaptivity is not intended to be used in all parts and assemblies. The key to using adaptive features effectively is knowing when to use them.
Concept

When you create a part containing adaptive features, their size is allowed to change when the assembly conditions require them to do so in order to successfully resolve constraints and associative sketches. You can use different approaches to create adaptive features, for example, you can design the part outside of the assembly and make specific features adaptive for later use, or create a part in the context of the assembly, and project geometry from other parts in the assembly, to automatically create adaptive features. In the example below, the gasket component was created by using an adaptive crosspart projection from the flange component. By changing dimensions on the flange component, the gasket features change to match the changes on the flange.

Adaptive Component - Before and After

Identifying Adaptive Parts and Features
Parts and features are identified in the browser with an adaptive icon indicating the adaptive status. It must be present at each level in order for adaptivity to function. At minimum you will have two adaptive indicators: (a) at the part level in the assembly, and (b) at the feature level. The adaptive indicator only appears at the sketch level if the sketch contains associative geometry or has been set to be adaptive.

352

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals

When to Use Adaptive Features
The following list represents some of the occasions to use adaptivity. • • • Your part contains features that are largely dependent for size or position, with other parts in the assembly. Your parts share common sketch geometry such as mating flanges. You need an easy way to update parts in the assembly when changes are required.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

353

Methods for Creating Adaptive Features
There are two methods available for creating adaptive features. The method you choose depends upon the design intent and which aspects of the geometry needs to be adaptive. While some adaptive features may only require certain parameters, such as extrusion distance, to change others may require the underlying sketch geometry to change as well.
Procedure

Using an associative reference sketch to create a feature. When you create parts in the context of the assembly, you can project geometry from other parts onto the current sketch. Depending upon the current Application Options settings, this geometry will either be associative reference or static. When the result of the geometry you project is associative reference geometry, the sketch is automatically set to be adaptive and any changes to the originating geometry will reflect in the reference geometry. To access this setting, on the Tools menu, click Application Options and click the Assembly tab.

Use Associative Reference Sketches to • Create a new component with features that need to mate with other features in the assembly. • Create a new component with features whose size and position are dependent upon the features of other parts in the assembly. For example a flange and end cap. • Create features that mate with a zero clearance. Create an underconstrained feature, and then make it adaptive. You create the sketch geometry and intentionally leave the geometry underconstrained. In order for a sketch feature to adapt, it must be underconstrained specifically on the elements of the sketch that you require to be adaptive. After you create the feature, in the browser, right-click on the

354

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals

Assign specific feature properties as adaptive. Create adaptive relationships when there is no existing geometry to project. • • Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Each feature you create has specific properties can be set as adaptive.feature and click Adaptive on the shortcut menu. Create adaptive relationships before you know which parts in the assembly you will constrain the adaptive features to. • Sketch (must be underconstrained) • Hole Depth • Nominal Diameter • Counterbore Diameter • Counterbore Depth Any or all of these features can be set as adaptive in the Feature Properties dialog box. Use Underconstrained Adaptive Features to • • • • • Create adaptive relationships with 2D layout sketch geometry. All Rights Reserved 355 . Creating mating features and control assembly clearances with constraint offset values. Adapt a feature to a component in another assembly level. For example. a hole feature has the following properties that can be set as adaptive. Inc.

3. the changes are automatically reflected in the referencing associative sketch. 2. on the Panel Bar. In the Options dialog box.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating adaptive sketches. 1. click the Assembly tab and confirm that the Enable Associative Edge/Loop Geometry Projection During In-Place Modeling is selected. Open or create an assembly containing at least one part. click the Project Geometry tool and select the edges or loops to be projected onto the new 356 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . click Application Options. Create a new part in the context of the assembly and activate the sketch to receive to associative reference geometry. With sketch activated. the Adaptive-Gasket's base feature sketch geometry is projected from the underlying flange part. If changes to the flange's sketch geometry occur.Adaptive Sketches You create adaptive sketches by projecting cross-part geometry as associative reference geometry. Procedure Adaptive Sketch Example In the image above. Creating Adaptive Sketches . If the originating geometry changes. then click OK. On the Tools menu. they will be automatically reflected in the projected adaptive sketch.

to project a loop. The projected geometry will appear on the sketch and in the browser as an adaptive reference. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 6.part. 4. All Rights Reserved 357 . Use the projected sketch geometry to create the required sketched features. select the edges specifically. Inc. select a point inside the edges. To project single edges. If necessary make changes to the original part and view the changes reflected in the adaptive part. 5.

right-click on a feature and select Properties on the shortcut menu. or by making specific feature properties. Using Mate and Flush assembly constraints. The feature properties dialog box contains an Adaptive section enabling you to determine which aspects of the feature are allowed to adapt. The options available will depend upon the type of feature selected. Procedure In the image below. such as an extrusion distance. adaptive. Adaptive Feature Example In the browser. Feature Properties Dialog Box 358 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .Adaptive Features You create Adaptive features by leaving certain aspects of the feature underconstrained. By leaving the geometry underconstrained. it is able to adapt to other features based upon assembly constraints. You do this by leaving dimensions and/or constraints off of sketch geometry. the adaptive part is driven through a series of updates and changes in size. the adaptive part is created with the initial sketch intentionally underconstrained.

Creating Adaptive Features .Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating adaptive features. 3. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 359 . Create a new part in the assembly with an underconstrained sketch. right-click on the feature and select Adaptive from the shortcut menu. Inc. Create the part as required using standard sketch features. 1. In the browser. 2.

The part feature updates to validate the assembly constraint. The adaptive part will update to validate the assembly constraint. 5. 6. Continue to add assembly constraints as required by the design intent. 360 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Continue to add assembly constraints as required by the design intent. Setting Initial Adaptive Feature Status Note You can set part features to be adaptive automatically as soon as they are created. click Application Options. Add assembly constraints according to the design intent. The part feature updates to validate the assembly constraint.4. On the Tools menu. click the Assembly tab and select the Features are initially adaptive option. In the Options dialog box.

iam file. or other modifications. only one occurrence can be specified as adaptive. Also. The image below represents two assembly files. the Pin-A component no longer fits the hole size of the Tri-Base. then click Adaptive on the shortcut menu. As a result. it cannot be used adaptively in another. will be reflected in every assembly in which the part is used. note that only one occurrence of the Pin-A component is set to be adaptive.iam file. In an assembly containing multiple occurrences of an adaptive part. the under constrained features on the adaptive part will resize to validate the assembly constraints.iam file. In the Tri-Assembly. All Rights Reserved 361 . If you require the same part to be adaptive in multiple assemblies. In the Adaptive-Occurrence. caused by adaptivity.Adaptive Occurrence in Assemblies When you add a part to an assembly that was created outside of the assembly and contains adaptive features. It is important to note that any changes to the adaptive part. you can use the Save Copy As command and save the part with a unique name for each adaptive occurrence you require in other assemblies. Procedure When you constrain the adaptive part to fixed features on other components. in this example. are also reflected in the second assembly. When a component is being used adaptively in one assembly. changes to the Pin-A component forced by adaptivity in the first assembly. To set the part as adaptive. right-click on the part. the same Pin-A component is being referenced. the part's adaptive status is not initially set. Any changes made to the adaptive occurrence will be automatically reflected in other occurrences. All other occurrences in the assembly will update to reflect the adaptive changes. Because it is used adaptively in the AdaptiveOccurrences. each containing a reference to the PinA component. it cannot be used adaptively in this assembly. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. in the browser or graphics window.ipt.

• 362 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . and sketch geometry. the constraint will be saved in an error state. and investigate the adaptive component's features.Applying Assembly Constraints You apply Assembly constraints to adaptive parts the same way you apply constraints to non-adaptive components. the constraint will be validated automatically. Although the message does not give details about the specific problem. you will have to reapply the constraint. it means that either some aspect of the feature's properties is not specified to be adaptive. This step is critical for performance. Procedure • • Adaptivity is not intended to be the cure all for all cross-part design challenges. Cancel or Accept the message. the component will move according to the remaining degrees of freedom before it adapts. additional processing is required. When this message appears. If you click Accept. If you click Cancel. An adaptive change will only occur when there are no remaining degrees of freedom that can be used to validate the constraint. as any changes to a feature will force Autodesk Inventor to evaluate the adaptivity. Common Assembly Constraint Error Tips and Considerations for Using Adaptivity The following list represents some tips and consideration for using Adaptivity. When you apply assembly constraints to adaptive components. when you use adaptive parts. Procedure The image below represents a common error that can occur when you apply constraints to adaptive components. then performance could be seriously effected. If your assembly contains hundreds (if not thousands) of parts. After you resolve the adaptive issue. Depending on the complexity of the assembly and parts. or a constraint or dimension is preventing the adaptive change to occur. turn off the adaptive status of the part in the assembly. assembly performance can be effected. After the adaptive changes have been applied. For each adaptive part in an assembly.

click Exercise: Adaptive Components 2. You will then modify the AdpReservoir component and view the effects on the adaptive components in the assembly. Completed Assembly with Adaptive Parts Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Exercise: Adaptive Components In this exercise. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. you will create three adaptive components in the assembly using both associative reference edges and adaptive features. From the Main table of contents page. All Rights Reserved 363 . Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Inc.

you will be able to • • • Analyze components in the assembly for interference Analyze faces on the part using the Zebra Style analysis Locate components using the Find option 364 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .Assembly Analysis Overview Overview Overview There are different tools available to assist you in analyzing components that are used in an assembly. In this lesson you will learn to analyze the assembly for interference between parts. You will also learn to perform different surface analyses on parts as well as using the Find option in the open dialog box to locate components based upon certain search criteria. and finding existing components. Completed Interference Analysis Objectives After completing this lesson.

If you define both sets and components within the same set interfere with each other. All Rights Reserved 365 . To check for interference by comparing each component to each other component. the interference will not be detected. Inc.The Analyze Interference Tool As you design components for your assembly. Components within this set will be compared against components in Set #2. Components within this set will be compared against components in Set #1. select all components for Set #1 and leave Set #2 empty. you may need to determine whether or not components in the assembly interfere with each other. When the interference analysis is performed. Procedure Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Analyze Interference tool. You can select components in the browser or in the graphics window. components in Set #1 are checked for interference with components in Set #2. The Analyze Interference tool enables you to check for interference between components in the assembly. Including components in this set is optional. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Define Set #2: Click this button then select the components to include in the second set. You can select components in the browser or in the graphics window. Pull Down Menu Tools > Interference Analysis Dialog Box Define Set #1: Click this button then select the components to include in the first set.

indicating the components and locations of interference. Interference Detected Dialog Box Analyzing Interference . You can also print it for further review.If interferences are detected. You can copy this information to the clipboard and then paste it into another application. On the Tools menu. 366 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . 2. Open an assembly. click Analyze Interference and select the components to be included in Set #1. 1. the Interference Detected dialog box appears.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for analyzing the assembly for interference between components.

use the major diameter option to create the threaded hole. Interference Between Threaded Holes and Standard Parts. All Rights Reserved 367 . Click the Define Set #2 button and select the components to be compared against the components in Set #1. 4. the Interference Detected dialog box appears giving a total number of interferences and the total volume. Inc. If an interference is found. Tip To prevent interference between threaded holes and fasteners. You can expand the dialog box for more information and to copy and/or print the results. Then click OK. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.3. The areas of interference are indicated in red in the graphics window.

click the arrow button to select the part or faces.The Analyze Faces Tool The Analyze Faces tool offers two different analysis styles. Procedure Each style is designed to perform specific analysis and will present the results of the analysis in a unique way. You use this style to check the continuity between surfaces. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Analyze Faces tool. In this lesson you will learn how to perform each of these analyses.Zebra Analysis In the Style area click the left button to activate the Zebra Analysis. Delete: Click to delete the selection set. Pull Down Menu Tools > Standard Toolbar Toggles the analysis display on/ off. Definition: Use these options to control the orientation of the pattern. 368 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . You use the Zebra Analysis to analyze consistency between faces and use the Draft Analysis style to analyze the suitability of a part for casting. New: Click to define a new selection set of faces. thickness of the stripes. Selection: In the Selection area. and opacity of the pattern. Zebra Analysis The Zebra Analysis analyzes the selected part or faces by checking for continuity between surfaces. Analyze Faces Dialog Box .

the selected faces are being analyzed for continuity along their common edge. All Rights Reserved 369 . 90 degree angles can cause problems when trying to pull the mold away from the part. If there were gaps between the selected faces. The Zebra Stripes make a uniform transition from one face to the other.Part: Enables you to select the entire part for analysis. indicating surface continuity. Faces: Enables you to select individual faces for analysis. Click OK or Apply to display the results. In the example above. When you design parts for casting. Analyze Faces Dialog Box .Draft Analysis Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The colors represent the draft angle range between angles specified. Inc. the Zebra Stripe pattern would indicate this with a non-uniform transition from one face to the next. The Draft Analysis style analyzes the selected part or faces and presents the results in a range of colors on the selected part or faces. Draft Analysis You use the Draft Analysis style to check the suitability of a part for casting. Face drafts are generally used to alleviate this problem by applying slight draft angles between faces.

370 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . In the Selection area.In the Style area click the right button to activate the Draft Analysis. New: Click to define a new selection set of faces. Faces represented in Blue or Green. while Red indicates 0 degree draft angles which could cause problems when trying to pull the mold away from the part. You can define individual selection sets with separate pull-directions. have acceptable draft angles. click the arrow to define. Faces: Enables you to select individual faces for analysis. Selection: In the Selection area click the arrow button to select the part or faces. Part: Enables you to select the entire part for analysis. Click OK or Apply to display the results. Definition: Enter the draft angle range to use for the analysis. the a draft analysis as been performed on the selected faces. The color ranges from blue (negative angle specified) to red (0 degree draft angle) to Green (positive angle specified). In the example above. and if necessary flip the pull direction for the current selection set. The green areas indicate safe draft angles while the red areas indicate 90 degree conditions. Delete: Click to delete the selection set.

All Rights Reserved 371 . The Find Assembly Components dialog box is accessed by clicking Find on the Edit menu. You access the Find: Autodesk Inventor Files dialog by clicking the Find button on the Open dialog box. You can create different searches by defining criteria based upon various file properties and save these custom searches for later use. while working in the context of the assembly. Keyboard Shortcut (Assemblies Only) Locates components within the active assembly only. Inc. the only difference is that the latter only searches the active assembly file. and highlights and selects the matching components in the browser. Procedure There are two slightly different versions of the Find dialog box. Both tools function the same way. Access Methods Use the following methods to access tools for locating files Autodesk Inventor files.Locating Components You can use the Find tool to locate files or components within the active assembly. Open Dialog Box Edit Menu (Assemblies Only) Locates components within the active assembly only. Click the Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. You create the search criteria by selecting the property from the Property drop-down list. provide a value. You then select the appropriate condition and if necessary. Find Find CTRL+F The main window in each of these dialog boxes lists the current search criteria.

then click Find Now to search for Autodesk Inventor files that meet the criteria defined. Find Autodesk Inventor Files Dialog Box Build and optionally save the search criteria.Add to list button to add the criteria to the main window list. where it would be difficult to manually locate components in the browser. Use the Save Search button to save the search for later use. You use this tool for large assemblies. then click Find Now to search for components in the active assembly that meet the defined criteria. Build and optionally save the search criteria. Find Assembly Components 372 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . and the Open Search button to load previously saved searches. Components that meet the criteria will be highlighted in the browser.

click Exercise: Assembly Analysis 2. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. Inc. you will use the concepts and techniques learned in this lesson to perform an interference analysis on an assembly. All Rights Reserved 373 . Completed Interference Analysis Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. From the Main table of contents page. You will use the Analyze Faces tool to analyze faces on a part file and complete the exercise by using the Find tool to find various files.Exercise: Assembly Analysis In this exercise. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.

If you require exploded views in your drawing you will first need to create the exploded view in a Presentation file.Presentations Overview Overview Overview You use Presentations files to create exploded views of the assembly. You can also use the Presentation environment to: • Help explain and visualize components in the assembly that would otherwise be obstructed from view when the assembly is shown in its assembled condition. you will be able to • • • Create a Presentation View Create Tweaks and Trails in a Presentation View Animate a Presentation View 374 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .ipn file which references the assembly and part files for the geometry. Assembly Exploded View Objectives After completing this lesson. In this lesson you will learn to create exploded views and animations. Visualize the interaction between parts in the assembly by animating the exploded view to show the assembly's transition between the assembled and exploded states. • The Presentation file is stored as a separate *.

Inc. and the browser displays view names and other information relevant to the Presentation environment. but you can only reference one assembly in each Presentation file. The Panel Bar contains the tools you use to create the Presentations. You store the Presentation in an *. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Presentation Environment The Presentation Environment is similar to the part modeling and assembly environment.ipn file. the graphics window displays the assembly geometry you use in the presentation views. There is no limit to the number of presentation views you can create. select Presentation. Presentation Environment Creating a Presentation View You use a Presentation View to create exploded views of the assembly. Default templates are available for Presentation files. All Rights Reserved 375 . Procedure On the Standard toolbar. you must create a Presentation File.Creating a Presentation Before you create a Presentation View. on the New fly-out menu.

it will be listed automatically in the File field. Manual: This option creates the Presentation View without exploding the assembly components. Automatic: This option creates the exploded view by automatically moving the components in the assembly based on the distance you enter in the Distance field. Create Trails: This option will create trails indicating the path of each component from its assembled position to the exploded position.Access Methods Use the following methods to access to Create View tool. Click the browse button to browse for a different design view file. Panel Bar When you select the Create View tool. 376 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Design View: Select the Design View to use as the basis for the Presentation View. Distance: Enter an explosion distance to move each component. Explosion Method: Select the explosion method from the following options. This option is only available if you select Automatic. and Insert. Select Assembly Dialog Box File: If you already have an assembly file open. Only components with certain assembly constraints such as Mate. You explode the view later by adding tweaks to move each component. the Select Assembly dialog box is displayed. you will need to enter the path for the assembly or select the browse button to browse for the assembly file. If you do not currently have an assembly file open. will be moved automatically.

double-click on the view in the browser. To create trails on the components. Each Presentation View is displayed in the browser. To automatically explode the components. select the Automatic explosion method and enter a distance in the Distance field. To activate a view. If necessary you can rename the view by performing a slow double-click on the name in the browser. click the Create Trails option. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.The image below represents a typical presentation containing two Presentation Views.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a Presentation View. Inc. On the Panel Bar. Other options are available for filtering the information presented in the browser. 1. 2. then click OK to create the Presentation View. You can expand it to display the assembly components. click the Create View tool. In the Select Assembly dialog box. All Rights Reserved 377 . Accept the default Design View or select one from the drop-down list. The view names listed here are the same view names available to create a 2D drawing view later. enter or browse for the assembly file to use in the Presentation View. Presentation View Creating a Presentation View . Create a new Presentation file.

3. enter a new value in the Edit Box at the bottom of the browser. The Presentation View is created accordingly and appears in the Presentation Browser. If you need to edit the tweak. Continue to create presentation views as required. 4. Expand the view to see the components and tweaks automatically applied. 378 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .

to its assembled location. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The blue axis indicates the current transformation axis. The direction does not have to be defined from a feature on the part you tweak. Once the direction triad appears. you can select elements of the triad to control the transformation. Even if you have chosen the automatic explosion method. Select a face or edge on any component to display the Triad icon. which represent a path from the components current location after tweaks have been applied. All Rights Reserved 379 . Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut T Tweak Component Dialog Box Direction: Click the Direction button to define the direction of the tweak. you may need to add tweaks to the components to move them to new locations in the exploded view. most exploded views will require manual tweaks.Creating Tweaks and Trails After you create the presentation view. When the tweaks are created you also have the option of displaying the trails. Trails help clarify how a component in an exploded view fits into the overall assembly. Procedure When you tweak a component you can move and/or rotate the component in any direction. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Tweak Components tool.

start dragging the distance with the cursor away from existing components. deselect it by holding down the CTL key and reselecting the component. Y. or Z here is the same as selecting each axis on the triad in the graphics window.You can switch the active direction by: • • Choosing another axis in the Tweak Component dialog box. Components: Click the Components button to select the components to tweak. Enter a distance or angle value for the tweak and click the green check mark button. Transformations: In the Tweak Component dialog box. in the Transformations area you can set the transformation options for the tweak. This option enables you to rotate the component around the selected axis. Inadvertently selecting a point over a component will add that component to the tweak. You can select the option to move or rotate the component. Trail Origin: Click the Trail Origin button to select a different trail origin. You can use the value field for tranlational and rotational tweaks. Note: When you drag the tweak distance. 380 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Clicking the X. Display Trails: Select this option to display trails showing the path of the tweak. Selecting the axis on the Triad to make it current. If you select a component by mistake. This option enables you to move the component along the selected axis.

3. you can tweak the component in different angles. Select the components to be included in the tweak. 1. This option is only available when the rotational transformation is selected.Edit Existing Trail: Click the Edit Existing Trail button to edit an existing trail. You will select the trail then adjust the tweak value. Inc. Creating Tweaks and Trails . Clear: Click to clear the current tweak and continue adding tweaks. 2. All Rights Reserved 381 . click the Tweak Components tool and select face or edge to define the tweak direction. In the same area. On the Panel Bar. Create a Presentation View.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating tweaks and trails. click the green check button to finish tweaking the triad. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. By rotating the triad. Triad Only: Select this option to rotate the triad only. Close: Click to close the dialog box.

Confirm the Transformation settings then click and drag in a blank area of the screen. When finished. Click Clear to apply the tweak and continue. and confirm the transformation direction. 382 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . click Close. Click and drag in a blank area of the graphics window and then click Clear to apply the tweak and continue. 5.4. Select the components to include in the tweak. 7. Repeat the steps above to continue tweaking components. Select a face or edge to define the direction. 6.

Animation Dialog Box Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. they appear as a group in the sequence list. By default the animation will play in the reverse order that you applied the tweaks. You can record the animation to a standard AVI format for use on other computers. After you play the animation. In this lesson you will learn the basics for animating a Presentation View. In the Animation dialog box. or pause. Expand the dialog box to examine the tweak sequence. Procedure There are several options available to animate the presentation view.Animating a Presentation View After you create the Presentation View. you can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the animation sequence of the selected tweak. in the Motion area. click Reset to reset the sequence back to the beginning. some of which are beyond the scope of this course. All Rights Reserved 383 . rewind. If you select items in the sequence list. When you tweak multiple components at the same time. click the Record button to record the animation to an standard AVI file. Panel Bar After you start the Animate tool. All items in a sequence group are animated at the same time. use the standard player controls to play. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Animate tool. Select items in the list and use the Group and Ungroup buttons to move items in and out of sequence groups. Inc. it is possible to animate the explosion sequence and visualize the components in the assembly moving into or out of their assembled position.

Browser Sequence View Click the Filter button at the top of the browser and select Sequence View on the flyout menu. Using this view it is possible to drag and drop component tweaks from one sequence to another. Browser Sequence View 384 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . This will display the tweaks in the sequence order that will be played during the animation sequence.

All Rights Reserved 385 . Inc. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. click Exercise: Presentations 2. you will create an exploded view of the components and then animate that exploded view. After creating the presentation. From the Main table of contents page. you will create a new presentation file of an assembly. Assembly Exploded View Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.Exercise: Presentations In this exercise. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Completed Assembly Challenge 386 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . From the Main table of contents page. click Challenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals 2. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals.Challenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals Challenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals Print Exercise Reference In this exercise. you will use the concepts and techniques learned in this chapter to create the assembly pictured in the image below.

Degrees of Freedom and how they effect each part in the assembly. Using assembly based work features to constrain components and using parts consisting of only 2D geometry to validate design intent. Replacing existing components in the assembly. Tips and considerations for using Adaptive parts in your assembly. Perform several different assembly related operations using the assembly browser. Creating Design Views to save custom views and display characteristics of the assembly. Simulating motion in an assembly by driving constraints and temporarily repositioning components in the assembly by using the Move Component and Rotate Component tools. Placing components in the assembly using the Place Component tool. Projecting geometry from other parts in the assembly when creating new components. Potential outside sources of geometry not created with Autodesk Inventor. The different approaches that can be used when creating assembly models and the environment and interface used as you create the assembly. Activating components and controlling the appearance properties of the browser. Inc.Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • • • • • • • What constitutes an assembly model and the overall process used to create them. Creating new parts in the context of the assembly. Resequencing and restructuring an assembly. Methods for creating adaptive features and sketches and how to control the adaptive status of these features. All Rights Reserved 387 . while understanding the potential effect on assembly constraints when doing so. Alternative methods for placing constraints on components in the assembly. Placing assembly constraints on components in your assembly. • • • • Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

388 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .

Creating and using text styles and dimension styles. Copy and/or move drawing views between sheets in the drawing. • • • • • • • • • In this chapter After completing this chapter. Managing views and sections after they have been created. Creating and editing section views on your drawing. • Creating and utilizing the available drafting standards to control several properties of your drawing. Creating and editing broken views. Copying and/or moving views between sheets in the drawing. Create base and projected views. Placing reference dimensions on the sheet. Creating and editing auxiliary views on your sheet. Project isometric views from the section to create an isometric section view. Creating base and projected views of your part or assembly files.. • Create and utilize the available drafting standard to control properties of your drawing. Creating general types of annotation on your drawing. Create and edit section views. Create and edit broken views on your sheet. Using various drawing resources. Retrieving model dimensions for use in the drawing. Create and edit auxiliary views on your sheet. Editing projected views and the options that are available. Create and use text styles and dimension styles. Creating detail views to magnify portions of your drawing view. Perform several functions involving drawing resources. you will be able to. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ... Retrieve model dimensions for use in the drawing. Create and edit detail views..Introduction to Drawings Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about. Creating and editing break out views as an alternative to standard section views.

Weld Symbols.Setting Drafting Standards Overview Overview Overview Autodesk Inventor software supports ANSI. and Parts Lists. Drafting Standards and Styles Objectives After completing this lesson. BSI. and JIS. In this lesson you will learn how to use drafting standards to control the appearance of drawing features. You use them to control the appearance of drawing features such as Balloons. ISO. you will be able to • • • • Use Drafting Standards to control the appearance of drawing features Create and use text styles in your drawing Create and use dimension styles in your drawings Create drawing templates 390 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . DIN. The default standard is determined by the option you select during installation and can be changed for each drawing. drafting standards. GB.

If you want the changes to be available to all new drawings. Inc. When you create a new drawing. the default drafting standard is determined by the options chosen during installation. You can use these standard as they are. Pull Down Menu Format > Drafting Standards Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. modify them. All Rights Reserved 391 . When you create or modify drafting standards. or create a new standard based upon one of the default standards. you must save the current drawing as template in your template directory. Principle Default Drafting Standards The following list represents the available default drafting standards. the changes apply only to the current drawing.Drafting Standards You use the Drafting Standards dialog box to control several different drawing feature properties. • • • • • • ANSI BSI DIN GB ISO JIS Access Methods Use the following method to access the Drafting Standards dialog box. You can create a new standard or modify an existing standard for the current drawing.

Several tabs. Drafting Standards Dialog Box 392 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .Drafting Standards Dialog Box Select the active drafting standard or click the Click to Add area to create new drafting standard based upon one of the existing standards. each containing different options for controlling properties stored within the drafting standard are available. Click the [>>] button to expand the Drafting Standards dialog box.

view projection. • Terminator Tab: This tab controls the type and size of leader and dimension terminators. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. • Sheet Tab: The options on this tab controls sheet specific properties such as labels and colors. • Common Tab: This tab controls common drawing properties such as default text style. and line properties. Inc.Drafting Standard Properties Each tab in the Drafting Standards dialog box contains properties for drawing features that are stored within the drafting standard. All Rights Reserved 393 .

394 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .• Dimension Style Tab: Select the active dimension style for the current standard. Unselected characters will not be available for dimensions. The characters must be selected to be available for dimensions. Only the selected symbols will be available for GD&T features. • Control Frame Tab: Use the options on this tab for Control Frame properties.

• Parts List Tab: This tab controls Parts Lists properties such as Text Style. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Heading.• Datum Target Tab: These options control Datum Target feature properties such as point size. and units. and Columns to be included. All Rights Reserved 395 . Inc. linetypes.

• Hatch Tab: These options set the default hatch pattern for section views.• Balloon Tab: These options control properties for Balloon features such as Text Style. Only the selected Hatches will be available when you create new hatch areas or modify existing hatch patterns. • Center Mark Tab: These options control the center mark properties. 396 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . and Offset Spacing. Balloon Type.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Only the selected symbols will be available in the drawing. • Weld Bead Recovery Tab: This tab controls the weld bead properties for weld features. Inc.• Welding Symbols Tab: These options control weld symbol properties. • Surface Texture Tab: These options control surface texture symbol properties. Only the selected symbols will be available when you place surface texture features. All Rights Reserved 397 .

Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a new drafting standard. On the Format menu. Click OK to close the Drafting Standards dialog box. click Drafting Standards. 1. 4. In the Drafting Standards dialog box. 2. and select the base standard from the drop-down list. select the Click to add new standard area. enter a name for your standard.Creating a new Drafting Standard . The new drafting standard will be listed among the default drafting standards and should appear selected in the Current column. 398 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . 3. Continue to modify other properties as required. In the New Standard dialog box.

Concept The image below represents the same text object with different text styles applied. Stored within the drawing. Pull Down Menu Standard Toolbar Text Styles Select to change the active text style. If you select one of these text styles in the Text Styles dialog box. Inc. All Rights Reserved 399 . Access Methods Use the following methods to access Text Style related functions. Different Text Styles Default Text Styles Note Within each drawing is a default text style for each drafting standard. and you want them available in other drawings. or apply a different text style to the selected text. you will need to save the current drawing containing the text style as a drawing template in your template directory. These text styles are named DEFAULT-Standard Name and cannot be modified or deleted. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. all options will be grayed out.Text Styles You create and use text styles to control the appearance of text features for annotation objects in your drawings. If you modify or create new text styles. the default text style is set within the current drafting standard.

Right. %Stretch: Specifies the width of the text. Underline). Rotation: Click to set the default rotation of the text.Text Styles Dialog Box You can adjust the following properties for all but the DEFAULT-Standard Name text styles. Line Spacing: In the drop-down list. 180. or enter a new value. 270. 0. Standard: In the drop-down list. or Multiply options. or 90 degrees. select the text font for the style. Size: In the drop-down list. Italic. select the drafting standard to display text styles. Bottom) and color. select the line spacing for the text style. select the size for the font. Justification (Left. Value: Enter a line spacing value. Top. Only available for the Exactly. 400 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Middle. Center. Format/Justification/Color: Select the options to control the format (Bold. Font: In the drop-down list. Style Name: Enter a name for the text style.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Applying a different text style . All Rights Reserved 401 . The selected annotation object updates to reflect the changes in the text style. then on the Standard toolbar. in the Style drop-down list. 2. 1.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for applying a different text style to an annotation object. Select an annotation object. Inc. select the Text Style.

you must save the drawing as a template or use the drawing orgranizer to copy dimension styles from an existing drawing to the current one. Pull Down Menu Standard Toolbar Format > Dimension Styles Select to set the active dimension style or change the dimension style of a selected dimension. Access Methods Use the following methods to access dimension style functions. In order to make your custom dimension styles available for other drawings. The default dimension style is set in the current drafting standard and each drafting standard includes a number of predefined dimension styles. Dimension styles are stored within the drawing. 402 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Each dimension contains a number of different properties that you can modify and save in a dimension style.Dimension Styles You create and use dimension styles to control the appearance properties of dimension objects in the drawing. Concept The following image shows several dimensions applied to the geometry using different dimension styles.

the Style drop-down list reflects the current dimension style.The Dimension Styles dialog box contains several tabs. Because the Style drop-down list is used for controlling other style related options. Select the dimension style to modify and adjust the properties as required. Dimension Styles Dialog Box Default Dimension Style Note Dimension styles named DEFAULT-Standard Name exist for each drafting standard and cannot be modified. They can be used as the basis for new dimension styles by selecting the dimension style and clicking New. All Rights Reserved 403 . each with a unique set of properties that you can adjust. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. Using Dimension Styles As you create dimensions in your drawing. the dimension style is only displayed when one of the dimension tools is active.

select a different style from the drop-down list. Dimension Style settings supersede the Drafting Standard settings. it assumes the properties of the current dimension style. 404 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Overriding Dimension Styles Dimension styles can be overridden by right-clicking on the dimension and then selecting Options or Tolerance on the shortcut menu. As you place the dimension. When a setting being changed is common to one found in the Drafting Standards or the Dimension Style dialog boxes. the rule of thumb is: • • Override settings supersede the Dimension Style settings.If you want to change the current dimension style. The selected style will become the current dimension style until it is changed.

Note Copying Dimension Styles The drawing organizer enables you to copy dimension styles from a source drawing to the current drawing. The drawing organizer works exactly like the organizer for materials. the overrides on that dimension will be lost. Select the dimension style(s) to copy and click the Copy button.Dimension Overrides If you apply a dimension style to a dimension containing overrides. color styles and lighting but only contains options specific to the drawing environment. To copy a dimension style. All Rights Reserved 405 . Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. enter or browse for the path of the source drawing containing the dimension style.

Pull Down Menu File > Save Copy As Before you save your drawing file as a template.Drawing Templates After you modify and create custom drafting standards. Save your drawing in this location or a subfolder to make it available as a template when you create new drawings. you should save the drawing as a template. • • • • • • • Drafting Standards Dimension Styles Text Styles Sheet Formats Borders Title Blocks Sketched Symbols Access Method Use the following method to create a drawing template. dimension styles. Procedure The following list represents settings or properties that are saved within a drawing template.Partial 406 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . By saving the drawing as a template. The File Tab of the Options dialog box contains a field setting for the template location. Options Dialog Box . text styles. you can create new drawings based on the template which will contain the custom settings created earlier. and other settings specific to your environment. determine the location for your template files.

and dimension style. From the Main table of contents page. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. 2. You will then save the drawing as a template a create a new drawing using the new template. All Rights Reserved 407 . Inc. you create a new drawing and define a new drafting standard. click Exercise: Setting Drafting Standards The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Drafting Standards and Styles Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. text style.Exercise: Setting Drafting Standards In this exercise.

borders. and views are all used to present information that meet typical drawing standards. title blocks. you will be able to • • • • • • • Edit the default sheet by changing its size. Features such as sheets. orientation and other options Create drawings containing predefined views by using Sheet Formats Create drawings containing multiple sheets Create sheet formats to enable you to easily create drawings containing predefined views Define a sheet border for use in future drawings Create a custom title block for use in future drawings Edit existing title blocks that are automatically placed on the drawing 408 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Drawing Created Using Drawing Resources Objectives After completing this lesson. In this lesson you learn how to utilize the various drawing resources available in a typical drawing environment.Drawing Resources Overview Overview Overview A typical Autodesk Inventor drawing contains several features that are not directly related to the 3D geometry they are used to represent.

Exclude from count: By default each sheet is counted and its number displayed in the title block. Width: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list.Editing the Default Sheet When you create a new drawing. it is created with one default sheet. Inc. and title block position that you can edit. Orientation: Select a title block position option and the orientation of the sheet Portrait or Landscape. Selecting this option will exclude the current sheet from the count and thereby not counted in the title block area showing the sheet number. Height: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list. enter a height for the sheet. orientation. All Rights Reserved 409 . Size: Select a predefined sheet size or select the custom size option in the drop-down list. Name: Enter a sheet name or accept the default. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Procedure Access Method Use the following method to access the Edit Sheet tool. Each sheet contains properties for size. enter a width for the sheet. Exclude from printing: Selecting this option will exclude the current sheet from printing when you select the All Sheets option in the Print Drawing dialog box. Shortcut Menu Right-click on the sheet in the browser > Edit Sheet Edit Sheet Dialog Box The following options are available in the Edit Sheet dialog box.

In the drawing browser. 1. The sheet in the graphics window and browser updates to reflect the new information. 410 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . 2. Adjust the options as required in the Edit Sheet dialog box and click OK. right-click on the sheet and click Edit Sheet on the shortcut menu.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for editing the default sheet. 3.Editing the Default Sheet .

Procedure A sheet format is defined for common sheet sizes. Each sheet format will consist of one view based upon a predefined orientation such as Front and other projected views. located under the drawing resources folder in the drawing browser. The view scale is set to 1 and may require editing after placement. the Select Component dialog box will appear. Double-click on a sheet format to create a new sheet using the pre-defined sheet size and views. In the drop-down list you can select from the list of currently open Autodesk Inventor files. is a Sheet Formats folder. Inc.Using a Sheet Format for Sheet Layout Included in each new drawing. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Drawing Browser Selecting the Component When you double-click on the sheet format. or use the Browse button to browse for the file. You can expand this folder to expose predefined sheet formats to automatically create pre-defined drawing views. A new sheet is created with the predefined views of the selected file. All Rights Reserved 411 . Access Methods Use the following method to access pre-defined sheet formats.

The image below represents multiple sheets in the browser. Pull Down Menu Drawing Browser Keyboard Shortcut Insert > Sheet Right-click in a blank area and click New Sheet SHIFT + N 412 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . To activate a sheet. Procedure When you create a new sheet in the drawing. depending on the method chosen to create the new sheet. you are not limited to the amount of sheets that can be included in a single drawing.Creating Multiple Sheets Although each new drawing is created with a single sheet. double-click on the sheet in the browser. The latter result only occurs when creating a new sheet by right-clicking in the browser and selecting New Sheet on the shortcut menu. Access Methods Use the following methods to add new sheets to the drawing. you will either be presented with the New Sheet dialog box or the sheet size and properties will be duplicated from the current sheet. You can only view one sheet at a time.

Size: Select a predefined sheet size from the drop-down list. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.New Sheet Dialog Box The following options are available in the New Sheet dialog box. enter a height for the sheet. Orientation: Select the appropriate orientation option. All Rights Reserved 413 . Height: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list. either Portrait or Landscape. Inc. enter a width for the sheet. Width: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list. or click Custom to enter a custom sheet size.

Procedure Custom sheet formats are stored in the current drawing. Unlike Dimension Styles and Text Styles. Save the current drawing as a template to have access to the sheet formats later. it will appear in the Sheet Formats folder in the drawing browser. Access Methods Use the following method to access the Create Sheet Format tool. You can also define custom sheet formats that represent sheet sizes and view positions that are common to your drawings.Creating Sheet Formats Each drawing contains predefined sheet formats that you can use to automatically create drawing views on a new sheet. If the drawings you create utilize the same view configuration and sheet size. Drawing Browser 414 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . After you create the new sheet format. sheet formats cannot be copied from another drawing using the Drawing Organizer. consider creating custom sheet formats.

right-click on the sheet and select Create Sheet Format dialog box. All Rights Reserved 415 . Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Create Sheet Format Dialog Box Name: Enter a sheet format name and click OK. In the browser.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating sheet formats. 2. Creating Sheet Formats . Create a drawing containing the sheet size and views common to other drawings that you create. 1.

Double-click on the sheet format to use it to create new sheets. 416 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Enter a descriptive name in the Create Sheet Format dialog box and click OK. 4. Your custom sheet format will appear in the Sheet Formats folder in the browser.3.

To define a new border.Defining a Border Procedure • Each drawing you create will contain a Default Border item listed in the Borders folder in the drawing browser. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. When creating a new border. After you create the border geometry. expand the Drawing Resources and right-click on the Borders folder and click Define New Border on the shortcut menu. consider these two items. right-click in the graphics window and click Save Border on the shortcut menu. • • Custom borders do not resize automatically if the sheet size changes. The default border is used on all new sheets and can resize dynamically when the sheet size is changed. • • • Use standard sketching tools to sketch the border geometry. You can define a custom border for use on your drawings. If you decide to create a custom border. you should create a new sheet based upon the size the new border will be designed to fit. All Rights Reserved 417 . Inc. • Enter a name in the Border dialog box and click OK.

To insert a different border. 418 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . double-click on it in the browser. After the border is deleted from the sheet. or add a new sheet to the existing drawing. you can double-click on a border in the Borders folder or right-click on a border and click Insert Drawing Border. you must first delete the existing border from the sheet. Inserting a Border When you create a new drawing. it will automatically contain a border.• To use the new border.

Use standard sketch tools to create the geometry and text features for the title block. or Author. In the image below. Text between < > indicates a non-static text entity. Enter a name for the new Title Block in the Title Block dialog box. right-click on the Title Blocks folder and select Define New Border on the shortcut menu. some static text while others are property fields. while Prompted Entry fields are populated by prompting you for the values to use in the dialog box. The new title block will be displayed in the browser under the Title Blocks folder. Procedure To define a new title block. All Rights Reserved 419 . You can include special text items such as Property fields or Prompted Entry fields in the title block. Title blocks are stored within the current drawing. After creating the geometry and text for the title block. Inc. therefore you should save the file containing the drawing as a template in order to have access to the custom title block later.Defining a Title Block You can define custom title blocks for use in your drawings. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. the default title block definition displays standard sketch geometry and dimensions as well as different types of text. Double-click on the title block to use it on the sheet. right click in the graphics window and click Save Title Block on the shortcut menu. Property fields are automatically populated based up file properties such as Part Number.

Inserting a Title Block When you create a new drawing. it will automatically contain a title block. you can double-click on a title block in the Title Blocks folder or right-click on a Title Block and click Insert. you must first delete the existing title block from the sheet. After the title block is deleted from the sheet. 420 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . or add a new sheet to the existing drawing. To insert a different title block.

Procedure Like other drawing resource items. Inc. Browser Browser Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. title blocks are stored in the current drawing so save the drawing as a template in order to have access to the revised title block at a later date. In most cases the default title block will only require minimal modifications to include information required by your company. All Rights Reserved 421 . Access Methods Use the following methods to edit a title block.Editing Title Blocks Each drawing template will contain at least one default title block that will be placed on each new sheet in the drawing.

Selecting this tool will display a different version of the Format Text dialog box as shown below. Format Field Text Dialog Box Select the appropriate property type based upon the text element you are creating. right-click on the title block and select Edit Definition on the shortcut menu. 422 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for editing title blocks.When you add text elements to the title block. For more information on these property types refer to the Autodesk Inventor software help system. A new sheet containing the title block definition is displayed. Editing Title Blocks . 1. in order to include property fields or prompted entry items. In the browser. 2. use the Property Field tool on the Panel Bar.

Add sketch geometry.3. Changes to the title block definition are applied to the sheet and the title block definition in stored in drawing resources. All Rights Reserved 423 . and property fields as required. 4. Right-click in the graphics window and click Save Title Block on the shortcut menu. Click Yes in the Save Edits dialog box. text. 5. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc.

Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. you will use the features available in the drawing resources folder to perform common tasks in the drawing environment.Exercise: Drawing Resources In this exercise. click Exercise: Drawing Resources The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Drawing Created Using Drawing Resources 424 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . 2. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. From the Main table of contents page.

manufacturing will require dimensioned drawings in order to build your design. Inc. you will be able to • • • Create a base view Create projected views from the base view Edit orthographic views and understand how other projected views may be affected Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 425 . In this lesson you learn how to create projected views of your part or assembly files. The first step in creating production drawings is to create the required orthographic and isometric views. Assembly Drawing with Projected Views Objectives After completing this lesson.Projected Views Overview Overview Overview After you complete the 3D design of your part or assembly.

If the part geometry changes. or presentation file is established. The image below is a base view of a part placed in the drawing. Panel Bar 426 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . The base view establishes the original view orientation and scale where the latter projected views will be based. the view orientation. the view is placed onto the sheet and an associative link between the drawing and the part. Procedure When you create the base view. those changes will reflect in the drawing. and style. scale. assembly. After you specify this information. you specify the file to be used for the view. Access Method Use the following method to access the Base View tool.Creating a Base View You create a base view to begin creating orthographic views.

All Rights Reserved 427 . If you have a part. you select them in the drop-down list.Hidden lines are displayed. Change View Orientation: Select this icon to open the model's 3D viewing window. Design View: Available only when you create a view of an Autodesk Inventor assembly. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. • Associative: When you create a view of an Assembly. Style: Select the rendering style for the view: • Hidden Line . If multiple files are open.Drawing View Dialog Box File: Enter or browse for the file to create its view. this option makes the view associative to the design view. You select the Design View to use for the initial view creation. Scale: Enter a scale or select a predefined scale on the flyout menu. assembly. Orientation: Select the orientation for the base view. or presentation file open. it will be the default file listed. This option is not available for default. The standard view orientations are based upon the origin planes of the file you select. You use standard view tools to define a custom view orientation. Move your cursor away from the dialog box to see a preview of the view before it is created. Show Scale: This option displays the scale on the sheet under the view.user design views. Weldment: Available only when creating a view of an Autodesk Inventor weldment assembly. Label: Enter a label for the view or accept the default view label. Inc. You use it when you edit projected views. Scale from Base: Not available when you create a base view. The view label is displayed in the drawing browser. Show Label: This option displays the view label on the sheet under the view.

and style. 4. Left click on the sheet to place the view. 1. 2. click the Base View tool. Shaded .Hidden lines are removed. 3. 428 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a base view in the drawing.• • Hidden Line Removed . Create a new drawing. On the Panel Bar.View is shaded using the same colors used in the assembly or part file Creating a Base View . Enter or browse for the Autodesk Inventor file to create the view and adjust the options such as orientation. scale. The base view is placed on the sheet according to the options specified.

It presents no options or dialog box. If you place the projected view to the right of the base view. the view orientation is automatically determined based upon its position on the sheet relative to the base view. All Rights Reserved 429 . you drag the projected views to the desired position. right-click. I you right-click on a view and select Create View > Projected. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. then position each projected view. First Angle projection method is also available. If you place the projected view at an angle from the base view. By default the following view properties are carried over from the base view: • • Scale Style (Orthographic Only) The following image represents a typical drawing with a base view and three projected views. Inc. it will generate a right-side projection of the base view. Drafting Standards Projection Setting Note The description above is based upon a Third Angle projection setting in the Drafting Standards dialog box. and select create on the shortcut menu.Creating Projected Views The Projected View tool enables you to create projected views from any existing view on the sheet. then after the view positions have been placed. it will generate an isometric view based upon the relative position from the base view. Procedure If you select the Projected View tool you must select the base view. All view positions are previewed by a bounding box prior to the views being created. When you create projected views.

430 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . On the Panel Bar. 2. A bounding box of the view will appear at the placement location. Move the cursor to the location of the projected view and left-click.Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Create View > Projected Creating Projected Views . 1.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating projected views. click the Projected View tool and select the base view.

4. The projected views are created based upon the positions selected on the sheet. Continue to select positions on the sheet for projected views. Right-click in the graphics window and click Create on the shortcut menu.3. All Rights Reserved 431 . 5. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc.

Procedure When you edit a Base view. Drawing View Dialog . all projected views with the Scale from Base option selected. however while editing a projected view. will update to reflect the new scale factor. Base or Projected. different options are available for editing.Editing a Base View 432 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . you can edit the view properties using the Drawing View dialog box. and the same rendering style. Depending on the type of view. these properties are linked to the base view to ensure the same scale across views. Editing a Base View While you edit a base view. On a projected view. you can change the Scale and Style properties. If you change the scale factor on the base view. you can edit any option that is not greyed out.Editing Projected Views After you create base and projected views. Access Methods Use the following method to edit views. Shortcut Menu Right-click on a view and click Edit View. you can only change these properties if you clear the options Scale from Base and/or Style from Base.

you can edit any option that is not greyed out.Editing a Projected View Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc.Editing a Projected View While you edit a projected view. Drawing Dialog Box . Clear the check mark for the Scale from Base and Style from Base options to change the view scale or rendering style. All Rights Reserved 433 .

2. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. From the Main table of contents page. Assembly Drawing with Projected Views 434 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . you will create a new drawing and place a base view and three projected views on the sheet. click Exercise: Projected Views The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.Exercise: Projected Views In this exercise.

Features that were obstructed or displayed as hidden lines. Section views enable you to better visualize these important details by removing the parts or features that are obstructing the view. important internal details are sometimes obscured by other features or parts. Completed Section Views Objectives After completing this lesson. are drawn with continuous lines with hatch patterns representing the section plane. you will be able to • • • Create section views in the drawing Create section views of the assembly in the drawing while controlling which parts are sectioned Edit section views by modifying the section line and editing the hatch pattern Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Section Views Overview Overview Overview When you create drawings of parts and assemblies. All Rights Reserved 435 . Inc. In this lesson you learn how to create section views of part and assembly drawings.

Procedure Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Section View tool. The section view is generated based upon the direction of sight in relation to the view being sectioned. you must have at least one view on the drawing on which the section line is drawn.Creating Section Views You create section views with the Section View tool. After drawing the section line. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Create View > Section 436 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . In order to create a section view. you pick a side of the current view for the section view.

and midpoints. All Rights Reserved 437 . you can hold the CTRL key down to prevent constraints from being inferred. • • • Hidden Line Hidden Line Removed Shaded Section Lines and Constraints When you draw the section line. Visible: When selected the view label will be visible on the sheet. Inc. endpoints. Style: Select a rendering style for the view. Constraining the section line to elements in the drawing view assist you in accurate positioning of the section line. Scale: Enter a scale factor for the section view. but can also make moving the section line later. You can constrain the sketch line to elements within the drawing view such as centers. more difficult. Visible: When selected the scale factor will be visible on the sheet. Label: Enter a label for the section view. 2D constraints are being inferred the same as when sketching in the 3D modeling environment. This technique is the same used to prevent constraints from being inferred in the modeling environment.Section View Dialog Box The following options are available in the Section View dialog box. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. When creating the section line.

Isometric Section View Tip You can use Projected View tool to project an isometric view from a section view the same way you would project a standard view.Follow the image sequence below to see the effect of constraints being inferred. 438 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

3. right-click in the graphics window and click Continue on the shortcut menu.Creating Section Views . On the Panel Bar. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. A red border will highlight the view. 1. All Rights Reserved 439 . click the Section View tool and select the view to be sectioned.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating section views. After drawing the section line. Sketch the section line. Note: You can draw the section line in one or more directions. 2.

4. 5. Drag the section view to one side of the view being sectioned. If necessary. The section view is created. adjust the section view options in the Section View dialog box and select a point on the screen to section the view. 440 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

You can also control which parts are sectioned. This can be done in the graphics window or in the browser. Inc. you can control which components are sectioned by right-clicking on the view being sectioned and clicking Show Contents on the shortcut menu. parts from the standard parts library are not sectioned. Controlling Component Sectioning When you create a section view of an assembly drawing view.Assembly Section Views When you create section views of assembly drawings. each part in the assembly section view will be hatched with different properties for visual clarity as the section plane passes through each part. however you can manually turn on sectioning for standard parts. All Rights Reserved 441 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. By default. Procedure You create section views for assembly drawings using the same techniques as single part section views.

Parts appearing with a gray icon indicate that the parts visibility is currently turned off. right-clicking on the components will present options on the shortcut menu. Tip 442 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . To prevent a part from being sectioned. After the contents of the assembly are displayed in the drawing browser. In order to prevent a component from being sectioned in the section view. not the section view. clear the check mark next to the Section option. you must turn off the section property on the view being sectioned.This results in the assembly and parts being listed under the view in the browser.

This will present the Sketch Panel Bar. You can apply/remove constraints. Inc. All Rights Reserved 443 . enabling you to edit the sketch geometry in the same way you would edit sketch geometry in the modeling environment. Procedure • Right-click on the view and click Edit View on the shortcut menu. • • Constraint Drag the section line. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. This can only be done on elements of the section line that are not constrained to drawing geometry. You can edit the section line by dragging elements of the section line to new positions.Editing Section Views After you create the section view. This will present the Drawing View dialog box enabling you to edit the view in the same way to would edit other projected views. apply dimensions to the sketch geometry. modify the sketch geometry. it can be edited a number of ways. Edit the sketch used for the section line.

enabling you to change the hatch pattern properties. Right click on a hatch pattern in the section view. This will present the Modify Hatch Pattern dialog box. 444 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .• Editing the hatch pattern.

Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. After creating the section view. you will turn off sectioning for some components and edit the section by moving the section line and changing the hatch pattern applied to some components. click Exercise: Section Views The completed exercise is shown in the following image. From the Main table of contents page. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. Inc. All Rights Reserved 445 . 2. Completed Section Views Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Exercise: Section Views In this exercise. you will create section views of the assembly.

Drawing with Detail Views Objectives After completing this lesson. changes in the original view. those changes also reflect in the detail view. it may be necessary to magnify drawing areas to show small details. If the geometry being magnified. When you create a detail view. and apply dimensions that would otherwise be difficult to clearly show.Detail Views Overview Overview Overview As you create 2D drawings for manufacturing. you will be able to • • Create detail views to magnify areas of your drawing Edit detail views 446 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . In this lesson you learn to create detail views. you magnify an area of the drawing while creating an associative link between the original view and the detail view.

The detail view will be positioned on the sheet at the selected point and will be scaled and labeled according to the options specified in the Detail View dialog box. All geometry contained within the detail view circle will be included in the detail view. After you select the start point. Although the view is scaled. just like other scaled views. Inc. you drag the cursor away from the start point which will preview the detail view circle. when you place dimensions on geometry within the view.Creating Detail Views You use the Detail View tool to create detail views of an existing view in the drawing. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Create View > Detail Detail View Dialog Box The following options are available in the Detail View dialog box. the dimensions will reflect the actual geometry size. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Detail View tool. After you select the end point of the fence. All Rights Reserved 447 . you are prompted to select a location for the view. When you start the tool. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Procedure The resulting view is associated with the main view and any changes effecting geometry within the detail view will be automatically reflected in the detail view. you are prompted to select a view then select a start point of the fence. The start point of the fence is the center of the detail view.

With at least one view on the drawing. click the Detail View tool. Visible: When selected the view label will be visible on the sheet. Select the view then select the center point of the detail view. Clicking OK will end the tool without creating the view.Label: Enter a label for the detail view. Style: Select a rendering style for the view. 1. Scale: Enter a scale factor for the detail view. but do not click OK. 2. on the Panel Bar. Drag the detail view fence outwards and select a point that will include all required geometry within the fence circle and left click to designate the end point of the 448 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . • • • Hidden Line Hidden Line Removed Shaded Creating Detail Views . Visible: When selected the scale factor will be visible on the sheet.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating detail views. 3. adjust the options as required. In the Detail View dialog box.

The detail view is created accordingly. All Rights Reserved 449 . 5. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.fence circle. 4. Inc. Position the detail view as required and left-click to place the view.

Selecting the center grip point will enable you to move the fence circle. Movement of the label is restricted to be along the diameter of the circle. rightclick on the detail view and click Edit View on the shortcut menu. Procedure You can also edit the detail view by editing the fence circle used to define the area of the detail view. 450 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . and style options. If you select the detail view fence and label on the main view. It is also possible to edit the location of the view label located on the detail view circle. The Drawing View dialog box is displayed. In the image below.Editing Detail Views You can edit detail views in the same way you would edit other types of views. Click and drag on the label to place it in a new location along the detail fence circle. while selecting a grip point on the circle will enable you to change the size of the fence circle and thereby effect the area included in the detail view. enabling you to change the scale. grip points will appear as shown in the image below. the detail view has been moved to a different area as well as resized. label.

2. From the Main table of contents page.Exercise: Detail Views In this exercise. Inc. All Rights Reserved 451 . you create and edit detail views. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. click Exercise: Detail Views The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Drawing with Detail Views Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

you will be able to: • • Create auxiliary views Edit and/or realign auxiliary views 452 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . In this lesson you learn to create auxiliary views.Auxiliary Views Overview Overview Overview When you create drawings of parts some features on the geometry are positioned in a way that they cannot be accurately represented based upon the standard planes of projection. This results in a view that is normal to the selected edge and therefore the features along that edge are represented correctly. Auxiliary views enable you to create additional views on the drawing that are projected at a perpendicular angle from the selected edge. Drawing Containing Rotated Auxiliary Views Objectives After completing this lesson.

Creating Auxiliary Views Occasionally a situation may arise in the drawing in which some features cannot be accurately represented by the standard projection planes. you may not be able to clearly dimension and/or represent the features. you can use the Auxiliary View tool to create drawing views that are projected and an angle that is perpendicular or parallel to the selected edge. Inc. creating 2D views of these features results in the features not being displayed at an angle normal to the face or feature. As a result of the feature orientation. All Rights Reserved 453 . When this occurs. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Create View > Auxiliary Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. This situation generally occurs when features on the part lie alone planes other than the standard XYZ planes on the part. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Auxiliary View tool. Procedure To resolve this situation.

1. • • • Hidden Line Hidden Line Removed Shaded Creating Auxiliary Views . Label: Enter a label for the auxiliary view. click the Auxiliary View tool and select the view. The Auxiliary View dialog box appears.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating auxiliary views. Adjust the options as required and select an edge in the view to base the auxiliary view on. Scale: Enter a scale factor for the auxiliary view. Visible: When selected the view label will be visible on the sheet. 454 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . With at least one view on the sheet. Visible: When selected the scale factor will be visible on the sheet. on the Panel Bar. Style: Select a rendering style for the view.Auxiliary View Dialog Box The following options are available in the Auxiliary View dialog. 2.

Drag the auxiliary view to the desired location and left-click to position the view. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Note: By default. 3. 4. The auxiliary view is created accordingly. All Rights Reserved 455 . the scale value will be the same as the selected view.

Procedure 1. You can right-click on the view and select Realign Auxiliary Views to reselect the edge used to define the auxiliary view direction. The following steps represent an overview for breaking the view alignment of an auxiliary view. 3. You can break the alignment of the view to position it differently on the sheet.Editing Auxiliary Views After you create the auxiliary view it can be edited in different ways. Right-click on the auxiliary view and click Alignment > Break on the shortcut menu. finding a suitable placement on the sheet at these angles can sometimes be difficult. By breaking the alignment of the view. 2. 2. 456 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Note the appearance of the view direction lines with labels matching the view label. In this lesson you learn how to break the view alignment and realign the auxiliary view. You can now drag the auxiliary view to any location on the sheet. 1. You can right-click on the view and select Edit View to use the Drawing View dialog box to make changes to the view just as you would other projected views. you are free to move the auxiliary view anywhere on the sheet. Breaking the Auxiliary View Alignment One drawback to creating auxiliary views is that by restricting the view placement to be perpendicular or parallel to the selected edge.

Inc.Realigning the Auxiliary View It is possible to realign the auxiliary view by reselecting the edge originally used in defining the view direction. In most cases these dimensions and/or annotations will need to be repositioned. All Rights Reserved 457 . 2. 1. One benefit to using this method to realign the view is that dimensions and annotations associated with the view will move with the view as it is realigned. The following steps represent an overview for realigning an auxiliary view. Select a different edge for the auxiliary view alignment. Right-click on the auxiliary view and click Realign auxiliary views on the shortcut menu. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

4. Drag the auxiliary view to its new position and left-click to place the view. Reposition and/or delete the dimension and annotations as required. 458 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .3.

2. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. Drawing Containing Rotated Auxiliary Views Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. From the Main table of contents page. All Rights Reserved 459 . click Exercise: Auxiliary Views The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Inc.Exercise: Auxiliary Views In this exercise. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. you will create and edit auxiliary views on the drawing.

Drawing Containing Broken Views Objectives After completing this lesson. In this lesson you learn to create broken views. You can use broken views when areas of the view can be removed without sacrificing the display of part features. you will be able to • • Use the Broken View tool to shorten elongated views Edit a broken view by moving the grip points defining the break 460 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .Broken Views Overview Overview Overview You use Broken views to shorten the view of elongated objects.

Note the appearance of the break lines and the break symbol on the dimension. All Rights Reserved 461 .Creating Broken Views You create broken views by creating a base or projected view. you use the Broken View tool to break the view. slider to adjust the display scale of the break lines. all parent or child views associated with the view being broken will also appear as broken views./Max. Inc. Gap: Enter a value for the gap between break lines on the sheet. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. the dimension lines will appear with a break symbol indicating the dimension is attached to a broken view. Procedure The image below represents a shift linkage rod displayed in a broken view format. If dimensions have been placed on the drawing. When you create a broken view. The dimension value will always represent the actual length being dimensioned. After you create the view to be broken. Rectangular or Structural. Style: Select the break line style. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Create View > Broken Broken View Dialog Box You can adjust the following options in the Broken View dialog box. Display: Use the Min.

The view is broken and the area removed. click the Broken View tool. sets the number of structural break symbols along the break lines. The area between these two points will be removed from the view. vertical or horizontal.Symbols: Available only when the Structural style is selected. 462 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Creating Broken Views . select the first and second break points. Do NOT click OK. 2. 1. Adjust the options in the Broken View dialog box as required. With at least one view on the sheet. 3. Orientation: Click the desired orientation.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating broken views. on the Panel Bar. With the Broken View dialog box still open.

All Rights Reserved 463 . You can also edit the broken view using methods specific to broken views. drag one break line over to the other side of the opposite break line. Inc. the break lines can be selected and will appear with a grip point at the center of the view as shown here. You use the Edit View tool to change properties such as Scale. To decrease the effective area of the view. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Click and drag on the grip point to move the break to a new location. Procedure When you create a broken view. You can also resize the break by clicking and dragging on the break lines. Labels. and Style.Editing Broken Views After you create the broken view you can edit it like other views. This has the effect of increasing or decreasing the area being removed by the break.

Exercise: Broken Views In this exercise. click Exercise: Broken Views The completed exercise is shown in the following image. 2. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. you create and edit broken views of the shifter linkage part. Drawing Containing Broken Views 464 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. From the Main table of contents page.

When you create a break out view. Drawing Containing Break Out Views Objectives After completing this lesson.Break Out Views Overview Overview Overview Sometimes section views remove too much information. All Rights Reserved 465 . you will be able to • • Create break out views to show internal part features Use different methods to edit a break out view Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. or prevent important features on the outside of the part from being ideally represented. you are cutting a window into the part or assembly to view features and/or parts that are obstructed by geometry. In this lesson you learn to create and edit break out views. Break Out views can help to alleviate this problem by limiting the section view to an area encompassed by a sketch boundary and sectioned to a specified depth.

Creating Break Out Views Before you create a break out view you must sketch a closed profile representing the area to be cut from the view. it will appear nested under the view in the browser. Procedure To create break out views. • • Select the view on the sheet. But in the drawing environment you can place your sketch on the sheet. Select the view in the drawing browser. As an indication that the sketch is attached to the view. or attach it to a drawing view. When you select the view it will appear with a green bounding box. 466 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . You can create sketches in the drawing the same way you create sketches in the modeling environment. To do this you select the drawing view prior to selecting the Sketch tool on the Standard toolbar. There are two methods for selecting the view prior to creating the sketch. the sketch must be attached to the drawing view.

it will be automatically selected. From Point: Select a point to set the depth of the break out view. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Create View > Break Out Break Out View Dialog Box The following options are available on the Break Out View dialog box. Boundary: Select the sketch to use as the boundary for the break out view. You can select a point in the current view or an adjacent projected or parent view.After you create the sketch you create a closed profile representing the area to be broken out from the view. Use standard sketching tools such as Lines. If only one closed profile exists. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Break Out View tool. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Splines. on the Standard toolbar. and Circles to create the closed profile. enter an offset value from the selected point. Depth: Select the following options in the drop-down list. Inc. All Rights Reserved 467 . Optionally. click Return to exit the sketch. After you create the close profile.

Show Hidden Edges: Temporarily displays hidden lines on a view in which they are not shown. Through Part: When you create a break out view on an assembly. To Hole: Select a hole in the current or adjacent view to set the break out view depth. Tip 468 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . this option will break though the part in the area enclosed by the boundary.To Sketch: Select a sketch line in an adjacent view to set the break out view depth. This enables you to select geometry that is hidden to set the view depth. Isometric Break Out View You can project an isometric view of a break out view in the same way you project other isometric views.

Edit Sketch: In the browser. right-click on the sketch used for the boundary to edit the sketch geometry.Editing Break Out Views After you create the break out view. Inc. All Rights Reserved 469 . you can edit the break out view using two additional methods that are unique to break out views. This will display the Break Out View dialog box enabling you to redefine how the view is created. Procedure Edit Definition: Right-click on the Break Out View in the browser and click Edit Definition on the shortcut menu. aside from the standard Edit View option on the shortcut menu. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

you will edit the break out view. From the Main table of contents page.Exercise: Break Out Views In this exercise. click Exercise: Break Out Views The completed exercise is shown in the following image. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. After creating the views. you create a break out view of the part and then project an isometric view of the break out view. Drawing Containing Break Out Views 470 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . 2. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.

you will be able to • • • • Use the different methods available to align drawing views Delete a drawing view from the sheet Copy a view from one sheet to another Move views in the drawing from one sheet to another Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. often times the views need to be moved. in some cases copied as well as deleted. All Rights Reserved 471 .Managing Views and Sections Overview Overview Overview As you create drawing it is often difficult to know exactly how many sheets will be required and exactly what the best position of the views will be. As you begin to apply dimensions and other annotations to the drawing. Drawing Containing Typical Views Objectives After completing this lesson. It is important you become proficient with managing your drawing views. In this lesson you learn to manage drawing views and sections. Inc.

Vertical .Breaks the alignment between views. Click the parent view for the alignment.Aligns views In Position. 2. In the following example the alignment between the two views has been broken.Aligning Views As you create drawing views they automatically align to the parent view from which they were projected. In Position . Aligning Views Horizontally 1.Aligns views horizontally. but there may be times when you need to change the alignment of drawing views to make better use of the available area on the sheet. 472 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . right-click on the view to be aligned and click Alignment > Horizontal on the shortcut menu. enabling you to move the view in any direction.Aligns views vertically. • • • • Horizontal . Break . The Horizontal alignment option will align the selected view horizontally with another view on the sheet. To realign the two views horizontally. Procedure There are four options related to aligning drawing views.

Aligning Views Vertically 1. The Vertical alignment option will align the selected view vertically with another view on the sheet. 2. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Click the parent view for the alignment. In the following example the alignment between the two views has been broken. All Rights Reserved 473 . Inc.3. The horizontal view alignment is established. To realign the two views vertically. right-click on the view to be aligned and click Alignment > Vertical on the shortcut menu.

To realign the two views in position. In the following example the alignment between the two views has been broken. right-click on the view to be aligned and click Alignment > In Position on the shortcut menu.3. The vertical view alignment is established. 474 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . In Position Alignment 1. The In Position alignment option will align the selected view based upon an axis that is neither vertical or horizontal.

All Rights Reserved 475 . Click the parent view for the alignment. 3.2. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The In Position view alignment is established. Inc.

Deleting a View You can delete views from the sheet by right-clicking on View on the sheet or in the browser. Expand the Delete View dialog box and click the Yes/ No field in the Delete column. you will be prompted to confirm the deletion of any existing dependent views. 476 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . and clicking Delete on the shortcut menu. Procedure If you select a parent view for deletion.

Procedure Double-click on the destination sheet and right-click on the sheet and click Paste on the shortcut menu. Inc. All Rights Reserved 477 .Copy Views between Sheets You can copy a view from one sheet to another by right-clicking on the view and clicking Copy on the shortcut menu. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The view is copied onto the other sheet and appears in the browser with a new view name.

Procedure 1. 478 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Note the change in appearance of the moved view in the browser. 2. Look for the position indicator showing the position of the view in the browser. In the browser. The selected view and all associated annotation is moved to the destination sheet. to activate the sheet of the selected view. You can right-click on the views with shortcut icons and click Go To on the shortcut menu. The destination sheet is automatically activated. click and drag on the view being moved to the destination sheet. Parent or dependent views of the moved view appear with shortcut icons with each view name indicating the sheet on which they are placed.Moving Views between Sheets You can move a view from one sheet to another by dragging the view in the drawing browser.

Inc. copying and moving views. click Exercise: Managing Views and Sections The completed exercise is shown in the following image.Exercise: Managing Views and Sections In this exercise. you will manage the drawing views by aligning. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. deleting. All Rights Reserved 479 . From the Main table of contents page. 2. Drawing Containing Typical Views Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

Drawing Containing Dimensions Objectives After completing this lesson. In this lesson you learn how to utilize model dimensions in the drawing and how to place general dimensions.Dimensioning a Drawing View Overview Overview Overview A requirement common to all drawings are dimensions. you will be able to • • Retrieve model dimensions for use in the drawing and understand the effect of editing these dimensions in the drawing Place dimensions on the drawing using different dimensioning tools 480 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . There are several different ways to place dimensions on the drawing. one of the first things you will do is begin to place the dimensions required to manufacture the part. After you place the drawing views.

Only those dimensions that are selected will be retrieved. Select View: Select the view to retrieve the model dimension into. When you start the tool. You can do this on both part and assembly drawing views. Select Dimensions: Select the dimensions in the drawing view to retrieve. you should utilize these dimensions on the drawing. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Retrieve Dimensions tool. All Rights Reserved 481 . When you retrieve model dimensions. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you select a view for the dimensions. You can only retrieve those dimensions that were created on the same plane as the selected view. you place parametric dimensions on sketches and features. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Right-click on a view and select > Retrieve Dimensions Retrieve Dimensions Dialog Box The following options are available on the Retrieve Dimensions dialog box. Procedure The Retrieve Dimensions tool enables you to retrieve dimensions from the model for use in the drawing. Inc. Select Parts: Select this option to retrieve dimensions from the entire part. you can select the dimensions that you want to retrieve while leaving others off.Retrieving Model Dimensions When you create your 3D model. When possible. Only required when you start the Retrieve Dimensions tool from the Panel Bar. Select Source: Select Features: Select this option to retrieve dimensions from selected features.

482 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . 2. On the Drawing Annotation Panel Bar. Select the Part or Features to retrieve dimensions from. 1.Retrieving Model Dimension . click the Retrieve Dimension tool and select the view to retrieve dimensions into.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for retrieving model dimensions into the view.

Only those dimensions that are selected here will be retrieved and placed in the view. Click and drag on the dimension value to adjust the dimensions position. 4. Editing Model Dimensions After retrieving the model dimensions you may be required to edit the dimension's position. The image below shows the dimensions in the positions in which they were retrieved.3. Inc. All Rights Reserved 483 . Click the Select Dimensions button and select the dimensions in the graphics window to retrieve. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Click OK to retrieve the dimensions and close the dialog box.

you have the option of editing model dimensions while in the drawing environment. 484 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Editing a hole dimension will present the following dialog box. Right-click on a model dimension in the drawing and select Edit Model Dimension on the shortcut menu. Options available in the Hole Dimensions dialog box are based upon the options used when creating the hole feature. Changing Model Dimension Values If enabled during installation. This will present the same Edit Dimension dialog box as presented in the modeling environment.Represented below is the same area of the drawing after dragging the dimensions to new locations.

Inc. Proceed with Caution! Note When you edit model dimensions in the drawing. Constraints will be re-evaluated and the geometry will update in the 3D model and drawing to reflect the new value. All Rights Reserved 485 .After changing the dimension value. Changing the dimension in the drawing environment will have the same effect as changing the dimension in the modeling environment. the geometry will update and the new value is reflected in the retrieved dimension. it is important to clarify that you are indeed changing the parametric dimension of the model. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

2.Placing Dimensions You place dimensions on the drawing using the same tool you use in the modeling environment. Procedure You use the same dimension tool for all types of general dimensions. the dimensions are nonparametric and do not control geometry size as in the modeling environment. 1. 486 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . To place a linear type dimension. These dimensions are associative and will update to reflect correct values if changes occur on the geometry where they were applied. radius. on the Panel Bar. and aligned. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut D Placing Dimensions . When you place dimensions in the drawing. diameter. Autodesk Inventor will place the correct type of dimension based upon the geometry selected. vertical.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview to placing different types of dimensions in the drawing environment. click the General Dimension and select a line or point being dimensioned. Place the dimension or select another line or point to dimension to. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the General Dimension tool. horizontal.

5. before placing the dimension. you are currently at the default offset spacing for the dimension. Position the dimension on the sheet. When the dimension preview is dotted.3. select a circular feature. select a linear element. 7. 4. Place the dimension on the sheet. 6. To dimension to an apparent intersection. All Rights Reserved 487 . Use this dotted preview to space your dimensions uniformly on the sheet. To place a radial or diameter dimension. then right-click Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. To change the dimension type. Inc. right-click and select Dimension Type > Click Type of Dimension.

Select the endpoint or another element to end the dimension. 8. Place the dimension on the sheet. 9. Select the next linear element to calculate the apparent intersection. 10. Extension lines to the apparent intersection are 488 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .and select Intersection on the shortcut menu.

All Rights Reserved 489 . This will present the Format Text dialog box.automatically added. Editing Dimension Text When you place dimensions on the drawing. User placed text can be entered before or after the dimension value placeholder. The dimension value is indicated by <<>> characters and cannot be deleted. you can edit the text to add text to the dimension. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Right-click on the dimension and click Text on the shortcut menu.

click Exercise: Dimensioning a Drawing View The completed exercise is shown in the following image. 2. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. From the Main table of contents page.Exercise: Dimensioning a Drawing View In this exercise. you will retrieve model dimensions into the drawing and use the General Dimension tool to add dimensions to different views. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. Drawing Containing Dimensions 490 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

Drawing Containing Typical Annotation Elements Objectives After completing this lesson. you will typically have other annotation requirements such as parts lists and balloons.General Annotation Placement Overview Overview Overview Annotating a typical drawing generally consists of more than just adding dimensions to features. you will be able to • • • • • Use hole tables to annotate holes Annotate centerlines and centermarks using both manual and automatic methods Create note and leader based annotation to the drawing Add a parts list to the drawing to further annotate the assembly Add balloons to parts in the assembly drawing Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. When documenting an assembly. In this lesson you learn to use additional annotation tools such as part lists and balloons when documenting your assembly. All Rights Reserved 491 .

The image below represents an example of a drawing view containing a series of holes. and Size of each hole. there are three main elements: (a) Hole Tags. Panel Bar 492 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Hole Table . which are placed next to each hole.Annotating Holes Aside from standard dimensions to annotate hole placement. Procedure Three different versions of the Hole Table tool are available: • • • Hole Table . Although the use of each of these tools will result in a Hole Table.Creates a Hole Table based upon all holes in the view. and (c) the Origin Indicator which identifies the 0.Creates a Hole Table of only those holes that are identical to the selected hole. Hole Table .Selected Type .0 location from which the hole locations are measured. you can also use Hole Tables to annotate the location and size of holes in a drawing view. Hole Position. (b) the Hole Table containing a row for each hole including the Hole Tag.Creates a Hole Table based upon the holes you select. accompanied by a typical hole table.View . When you place a hole table on your drawing.Selection . each version of the tool enables you to select the holes to include using a different method. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Hole Table tools.

1. Position the origin indicator within the view allowing a coincident constraint to be inferred. 4. Inc. On the Panel Bar.Selection tool. Select the holes to include in the table. 3.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a hole table using the Hole Table .Selection tool and select the view containing the holes to include in the table. 2. Right-click in the graphics window and click Create. Then position the hole table on the sheet.Selection Tool . All Rights Reserved 493 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. You can select the holes individually or by dragging a selection window around the holes to include.Hole Table . click the Hole Table .

On the Panel Bar. 2. 1. 494 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .5. Position the origin indicator within the view allowing a coincident constraint to be inferred. The Hole Table and Tags appear on the drawing. Position the Hole Table on the sheet.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a hole table with the Hole Table . Hole Table . click the Hole Table .View tool. 3. It is not necessary to select the holes as all holes in the view will be included in the Hole Table.View Tool .View tool and select the view containing the holes to include in the table.

Selected Type tool and select the view containing the holes to be included in the hole table. All Rights Reserved 495 . 2. The Hole Table and Tags appear on the sheet. 4. Inc. 1.Selected Type . then position the hole table on Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Selected Type tool. click the Hole Table . Select one hole of each type you want to include in the hole table. Position the origin indicator within the view allowing a coincident constraint to be inferred. 3. On the Panel Bar.4. Right-click and select Create on the shortcut menu.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a hole table using the Hole Table . Hole Table .

the sheet. right-click on the row you would like to split and click Table > Split 496 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Editing Hole Tables After you create the hole table. 5. Right-click on the hole table to reveal several different options to edit the appearance and information contained within the table. Only the holes matching the type of hole selected are included in the hole table. you can edit the table in a number of different ways. To split the hole table.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. Selecting Remove will remove the hole in the selected row from the Hole Table. Selecting Add will enable you to select another hole previously not included in the table and add it to the list. right-click on the hole table and click Row > Add or Remove. To add or remove holes from the table.The table is split into two and can be moved to a different location. All Rights Reserved 497 .

Controls the visibility of the origin indicator Tag .Hides all Tags Show All Tags .Controls the visibility of the selected tag. See below for more information. 498 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .Enables you to edit the text used for the hole tag.You can control the visibility of hole table elements by right-clicking on the hole table and selecting Visibility > • • • • Origin . Options . Hide All Tags . The tag will change in the table and in the drawing view.Shows all Tags Right-click on the hole table and select Edit > • • Edit Tag .Presents the Edit Hole Table dialog box.

or None. Remove properties by selecting the property in the Selected Properties list and clicking Remove.Edit Hole Table Dialog Box The following options are available in the Edit Hole Table dialog box. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Title Position: Select a title position of Top. Numbering: This option replaces the alphanumeric tags with sequential hole numbers. Inc. Select the inside or outside button to set properties for each. Line Weight: Enter line weights and colors for the table. You cannot delete a default column New Field: Select to create a custom column that you can use to add data to the hole table. Available Properties: Select the available properties to include in the list by selecting the property and clicking the Add button. Bottom. All Rights Reserved 499 . Delete: Select to delete a custom column. Move Up/Move Down: Adjust the order of the selected properties. Only the first hole of each hole type is listed in the table. Combine Notes: This option combines the notes cells for identical holes. Selected Properties: Lists the currently selected properties appearing as columns in the table. Rollup: This option combines the hole's table rows of the same type in the hole table. The position in the list represents the order of columns in the table left to right.

Right-click on a view and select Automated Centerlines from the shortcut menu.Annotating Centerlines and Center Marks Several tools are available to annotate your drawing with centerlines and centermarks. The Centerline Settings dialog box enables you to set various criteria for the automated centerlines. Only the features matching the type(s) selected and meeting the threshold settings will receive automatic centerlines. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Right-click on a view and select Automated Centerlines Placing Centerlines and Center Marks Automatically You can place centerlines and centermarks automatically in a view by using the Automated Centerline tool. You can place these annotations manually using the different tools available or place them automatically using the Automated Centerline tool. Procedure Access Methods Use the following methods to access centerline and centermark tools. 500 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

Inc. Precision: Set the precision to be used when analyzing the features against the threshold values. Setting these options in the Document Settings will store the settings in the drawing or template.Centerline Settings Apply To: Select the types of features you would like to automatically apply centerlines or centermarks Projection: Select the view projection. then click the Drawing Tab and select the Automated Centerline Settings button. Note: These settings can also be set in the Document Settings for the drawing. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 501 . On the Tools menu. click Document Settings. Threshold: • • • Fillet: Set the minimum and maximum thresholds for fillets to receive automatic centerlines. Circular Edges: Set the minimum and maximum thresholds for circular edges to receive automatic centerlines. alleviating the task of having to set these options each time.

Creating Automatic Centerlines . 2. Right-click on the drawing view and click Automated Centerlines. 502 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Adjust the feature type and threshold options and click OK. 3. The automatic centerlines are applied to features matching the selected type and threshold settings.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for applying centerlines automatically to a drawing view. 1.

click the Center Mark tool. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Center Mark tool. 4. Select a circular shape or feature. Continue selecting circular features or right-click and select Done. All Rights Reserved 503 . 1.Using the Center Mark Tool . The center mark is added to the drawing view. 3. Inc. 2. On the Panel Bar.

The midpoint of the edge is automatically calculated. On the Panel Bar. Right-click in the graphics window and click Create on the shortcut menu. Then centerline is created passing through the midpoint of each selected edge. 1.Using the Centerline Tool . 2. Again the midpoint of the edge is automatically calculated. 3. Select the next edge for the centerline to pass through.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Centerline tool to add centerlines to your drawing view. click the Centerline tool and select an edge. 504 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

All Rights Reserved 505 . The centerline is calculated and drawn by bisecting the angle of the two edges selected. On the Panel Bar. 3. click the Centerline Bisector tool and select the first edge to bisect. 2. Select the second edge. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Using the Centerline Bisector Tool . 1.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Centerline Bisector tool to add centerlines to your drawing views.

As soon as you select two features. 3. 4. click the Centered Pattern tool. the circular centerline will appear. On the Panel Bar. Continue selecting features as required. Click the location representing the center of the pattern. 1.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Centered Pattern tool to place centerlines on your drawing view.Using the Centered Pattern Tool . 506 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . then right-click and select Create on the shortcut menu. Select the features of the pattern. 2.

color. Component: Optional . and width as required. the Leader Text tool attaches a leader with text to the geometry within the view. Format Text Dialog Box The following options are available in the Format Text dialog box. The leaders are associative to the view and will move if the view moves.Notes and Leaders You use the Text and Leader Text tools to add notes and leaders to the drawing views. All Rights Reserved 507 . Text Format: Adjust the text formatting options such as justification. Style: Select a text style for the text or accept the default text style listed.Select the component to be used for parameters. use the Format Text dialog box to add text to your drawing. Procedure Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Text and Leader Text tools. Panel Bar Panel Bar Common to both the Text and Leader Text tools. While you use the Text tool to place paragraph style text on the sheet. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

Source: Optional - Select Model Parameters or User Parameters. Parameter: Optional - Select the parameter to use in the text. Precision: Optional - Enter a precision for the parameter value. d0 Button: Optional - Click to add the selected parameter to the text window. Text Font: Select a font from the drop-down list. Height: Enter or select a text height. If you enter a text height once, it will be available in the list for future text in this drawing. Symbols Flyout: Select a special symbol to insert into the text.

Adding Text - Process Overview
The following steps represent an overview for adding text to the drawing. 1. On the Panel Bar, click the Text tool and click and drag the rectangle text boundary.

2.

In the Format Text dialog box, enter the text, adjust options as required and click OK.

Adding Leader Text - Process Overview
The following steps represent an overview for adding leader text to your drawing.

508

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

1.

On the Panel Bar, click the Leader Text tool then select a start point and second point for the leader.

2.

Right-click in the graphics window and click Continue on the shortcut menu.

3.

Enter the text for the leader and click OK.

4.

The leader text is attached to the drawing geometry.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

509

Editing Text
Right-click on a text object to access text editing options.

Text Shortcut Menu

Edit Text: Displays the Format Text dialog box. Rotate 90 CW: Rotates the selected text 90 degrees clockwise. Rotate 90 CCW: Rotates the selected text 90 degrees counter clockwise.

Editing Leader Text
Right-click on a leader text object to access the text editing options.

Leader Text Shortcut Menu Options

Edit Leader Text: Displays the Format Text dialog box. Edit Arrowhead: Displays the Change Arrowhead dialog box. In the drop-down list, select a different arrowhead. Add Vertex / Leader: Select to add a vertex to the leader. Delete Leader: Select this option to delete the leader.

510

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

Parts Lists
You use Parts lists to annotate an assembly drawing by creating a table of parts included in the drawing. When you create a parts list you must first select a view. The parts list is based upon components in the selected view.
Procedure

Access Methods
Using the following method to access the Parts List tool. Panel Bar

The first time you create a parts list or balloon on the drawing you are presented with the Parts List - Item Numbering dialog box. The options in this dialog box enable you to control which components appear in the Parts List and how they are numbered. The options you choose apply to all parts lists and balloons in the drawing. The options in this dialog box are only set once in the current drawing, unless all balloons and parts lists are deleted.

Parts List - Item Numbering Dialog Box

The following options are available and can be edited. First-Level Components: This option numbers all first-level parts and subassemblies. You can display parts residing within a subassembly in the parts list and their numbers will be prefixed with the number of the item number of the subassembly. For example, if a subassembly in the parts list has an item number of 2, the parts residing within the parts list will be numbered 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3. Only Parts: This option numbers all first-level parts and parts within subassemblies, using standard item numbers. Subassemblies will not be listed or numbered in the parts list table.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

511

All: When selected, all parts in the assembly are numbered and listed. Not applicable or available when ballooning. Items: Only available when the Only Parts level option is chosen, enter a range of parts to include in the parts list. Valid syntax is as follows: Not applicable or available when ballooning. • Entering 1-4,6,8,10 - would list items 1-4 and items 6, 8, and 10 in the assembly.

Table Wrapping: The following section is not available when ballooning. Number of Sections: Enter the number of sections to wrap the table. For example, if you enter 2, a 10 part list will be wrapped into two columns with 5 rows each. Direction to Wrap Table: Select the direction to wrap the table, left or right.

Creating a Parts List - Process Overview
The following steps represent an overview for adding a parts list to your drawing. 1. On the Panel Bar, click the Parts List tool and select a drawing view.

2.

Adjust the options in the Parts-List - Item Numbering dialog box as required and click OK.

3.

Left-click to position the parts list on the drawing.

512

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

4.

The parts list appears on the drawing.

Editing Parts Lists
After you create the parts list you can edit it to add/remove columns, merge rows, expand the display of subassemblies, and change other properties that control the display and content of the parts list. To edit a parts list, right-click on the parts list and select Edit Parts List on the shortcut menu.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

513

The Edit Parts List dialog box enables you to modify several different properties of the parts list. For more information on editing a parts list, refer to the Autodesk Inventor Help system.

Edit Parts List Dialog Box

To add a column to the parts list, click the Column Chooser button. This will display the Parts List Column Chooser dialog box. Select from the available properties and click the ADD button to add the property to the selected property list.

Click OK to exit each dialog box. The new column will appear in the parts list on the drawing.

514

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

Updating the Parts List
If changes occur in the assembly model being referenced by the parts list, the parts list may not automatically update. If the parts list requires an update, it is indicated by a red lightning bolt next to the parts list in the drawing browser. Right-click on the parts list in the browser or graphics window and click Update on the shortcut menu.

Note: Updating the parts list will remove any information manually input into the parts list columns or cells that have not been frozen. To protect a cell from being overwritten, in the Edit Parts List dialog box, right-click on the cell and select Freeze Value on the shortcut menu.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

515

Placing Balloons
You place balloons on assembly drawings to identify parts in the drawing and relate them to rows in the parts list. When you place a balloon on a part, the item number of the part will appear in the balloon. This item number is the same item number used in the parts list.
Procedure

Balloons and parts lists are associative. If an item number in the parts list changes, the change will also be reflected in the balloon. This associativity is unidirectional only. If you override the item number in the balloon, the new value is not reflected in the parts list.

Access Methods
Use the following methods to access the Balloon and Balloon All tools. Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut

B

The first time you create a parts list or balloon on the drawing you are presented with the Parts List - Item Numbering dialog box. The options in this dialog box enable you to control which components appear in the Parts List and how they are numbered. The options you choose apply to all parts lists and balloons in the drawing. The options in this dialog box are only set once in the current drawing, unless all balloons and parts lists are deleted.

516

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

Parts List - Item Numbering Dialog Box

The following options are available and can be edited. First-Level Components: This option numbers all first-level parts and subassemblies. You can display parts residing within a subassembly in the parts list and their numbers will be prefixed with the number of the item number of the subassembly. For example, if a subassembly in the parts list has an item number of 2, the parts residing within the parts list will be numbered 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3. Only Parts: This option numbers all first-level parts and parts within subassemblies, using standard item numbers. Subassemblies will not be listed or numbered in the parts list table. All: When selected, all parts in the assembly are numbered and listed. Not applicable or available when ballooning. Items: Only available when the Only Parts level option is chosen, enter a range of parts to include in the parts list. Valid syntax is as follows: Not applicable or available when ballooning. • Entering 1-4,6,8,10 - would list items 1-4 and items 6, 8, and 10 in the assembly.

Table Wrapping: The following section is not available when ballooning. Number of Sections: Enter the number of sections to wrap the table. For example, if you enter 2, a 10 part list will be wrapped into two columns with 5 rows each. Direction to Wrap Table: Select the direction to wrap the table, left or right.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

517

right-click and select Continue on the shortcut menu.Placing Individual Balloons . 3. Right-click in the graphics window and click Done when completed. 1. On the Panel Bar. 2. Adjust the options as required and click OK. and there is no parts list in the drawing. the Parts List .Item Numbering dialog box will appear. Continue selecting component and placing balloons as required. click the Balloon tool and select a component in the drawing view. Left-click to position the balloon then. 518 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . If this is the first balloon.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for placing individual balloons on your drawing.

Inc. Click and drag on each balloon to reposition them as required.Item Numbering dialog box will appear.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Balloon All tool to balloon all components in the drawing view at once. 2. All Rights Reserved 519 . Adjust the options as required and click OK. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. the Parts List . You will also have to manually adjust the position of the balloons. If there is no parts list in the drawing.Placing Balloons Using the Balloon All Tool . 1. click the Balloon All tool and select a drawing view. On the Panel Bar. The balloons are automatically applied to the assembly components. Note: Balloons are only placed on the first occurrence of each part. 3.

Editing Balloons After you place the balloons on the sheet. Balloon Type: Clear this option in order to select a different balloon type. as well as override the balloon value. The Edit Balloon dialog box enables you to change the balloon type. Note: If you override the balloon value. 520 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . you can edit them by right-clicking on the balloon and selecting Edit Balloon on the shortcut menu. you can select a sketched symbol to use for the balloon. Balloon Value: Enter an override value in the override column. the new value is not reflected in the Parts List. To use the override value. select the cell and click OK Click the Item cell to use the original item number in the balloon. Symbols: If your drawing contains sketched symbols.

click Exercise: General Annotation Placement The completed exercise is shown in the following image. 2. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. Inc. notes. leaders. Drawing Containing Typical Annotation Elements Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. parts lists and balloons. From the Main table of contents page. you open the drawing file and use the tools learned in this lesson to annotate the drawing with centerlines.Exercise: General Annotation Placement In this exercise. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. All Rights Reserved 521 .

From the Main table of contents page. you will open a drawing and assume this drawing must meet your own company standards. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. annotation.Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Drawings Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Drawings Print Exercise Reference In this exercise. You will edit the drawing by modifying or creating views. 2. Challenge Exercise Drawing 522 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . dimensions styles and any other properties that would be required to complete the drawing to your company's standards. click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Drawings The completed exercise is shown in the following image. title blocks. drawing standards.

You also learned how to edit these views by changing the scale. and annotation associated with the detail view. You also learned how the available options in the Broken View dialog box can effect the view as it is created. You learned about the options available in the Break Out View dialog box and how to use these options to generate the required view. How to perform several functions related to managing drawing resources. How to create and edit auxiliary views. How to create and edit Break Out views. How to create section views of parts and assemblies. How to create sketch geometry representing the section path and how to project isometric section views. • • • • • • • • Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. How to place additional reference dimensions on the sheet. Inc. All Rights Reserved 523 . How to delete drawing views and copy and/or move views from one sheet to another in the current drawing. How to create and edit broken views on your sheet. How to apply different types of annotation objects to your drawing. How to manage drawing views and sections by adjusting the alignment options as required. area effected. The options available in the Drawing View dialog box and how they effect the drawing views when you create them. How to create and use text styles and dimension styles. How to create and edit base views and projected views. How to save text and dimension styles within a drawing template for later use.Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • • How to create and utilize drafting standards. How to retrieve model dimensions for use in the drawing. How to magnify a specific area on your drawing by creating detail views.

524 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

• • • . Create 2D documentation on a created assembly file. 2. • Create an assembly based on parameters defined in a 2D drawing. 3. In this chapter After completing this chapter.Project Exercise Review the goals and images of the drawings that follow.. To navigate to the exercises in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. From the Main table of contents page. you will be able to. Create a presentation file that documents assembly instructions for a completed assembly.. click Chapter 8: Project Exercise From the table of contents for Chapter 8: Project Exercise. click Overview Review the goals for the exercise and use the navigation buttons in the Electronic Student Workbook to work through the exercises. You can find guidelines to aid in completing the models for the drawing files using the Electronic Student Workbook. Create and assemble a number of parts based on parameters defined in 2D drawings.

526 Chapter 8: Project Exercise . you create the assembly model for the ICU. and generating drawings of individual parts and the assembly of those parts. The approach shown here is intended to illustrate the use of Autodesk Inventor software for modeling. During this process you assembly the parts you design. perform interference detection. After you model and detail each part. It incorporates the design and documentation of seven separate parts and an assembly of 14 components. The approach outlined in this exercise is not the only way to approach the design of this Irrigation Control Unit. and generate a drawing of the assembly showing part interaction. analyzing. Completed Irrigation Control Unit Objectives This all-inclusive exercise requires more than the design of a single part.Irrigation Control Unit Overview Overview Overview In this exercise you build the Irrigation Control Unit shown below. calculate mass properties. assembly instructions. and a bill of materials. You will design each part of the Irrigation Control Unit (ICU) from scratch.

the solution from the main flow tube of the ICU flows through the exit tube. By completing this exercise you will explore the following Autodesk Inventor capabilities: Using Feature Patterns Defining Tapped Holes Using Hole Notes Using Parameters and Linking Mirroring Parts Using Construction Lines Part Drawing Creation Presentation File Creation Attaching Balloons to Components Generating Mass Properties Assembly Drawing Creation Constraining Components Using Projected Edges Copying Sketches Using To-Face Terminations Shelling Parts Interference Detection Tweaking and Applying Trails Generating a Bill of Materials Part Modification in an Assembly It is recommended that you create all of the parts contained in the Irrigation Control Unit by following the instructions in this exercise. Individual part design goals are provided as that portion of the exercise is presented to you. Components (other than the rubber O-Rings) must not interfere. • • • • All parts must be fully parametric and have individual part drawings. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The following is a list of goals or rules for the creation of the Irrigation Control Unit. the solution from the main flow tube is restricted from flowing through the Valve and out the exit tubes. or both gates provided in the Valves and out the exit tubes. but should take no longer than 6-8 hours. When the Valve is in the closed position. Parts must be designed to match the following drawings. When the Valve is in the open position. Inc. All parts must be created in Metric (mm) units. Solution flow is controlled by Valves located in the main cavities of the ICU. left. This list describes your design criteria for the entire ICU exercise. You will gain the greatest benefit from this exercise by completing the design and documentation of each part as well as the assembly. When a button is pressed. the solution flows through the right. Design Goals The Irrigation Control Unit documented in this project controls the flow of a solution to two separate locations through the use of Right and Left Buttons.The average time required to complete this exercise varies. All Rights Reserved 527 .

Irrigation Control Unit .Closed Position 528 Chapter 8: Project Exercise .

Irrigation Control Unit . Inc. All Rights Reserved 529 .Open Position Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

Valve Housing 530 Chapter 8: Project Exercise .

All Rights Reserved 531 .Completed Irrigation Control Unit Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc.

Valve 532 Chapter 8: Project Exercise .

Inc.Left and Right Buttons Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 533 .

534 Chapter 8: Project Exercise .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful